JP2019103641A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent reduction in the performance effect in a case of executing the change performance.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute the performance of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode having the high advantageous degree (for example, blue-color holding or red-color holding) after displaying the specific display (for example, holding display) in the first mode (for example, special holding) as the change performance (for example, holding notice performance followed by the action performance), and can execute the performance of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal holding) in a case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display in the first mode as the change performance. The specific display displayed in the third mode has the lower ratio of changing to the second mode than the specific display displayed in the first mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display means is a specific display result There is one configured to give the player a player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (favorable condition)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured to be able to display a specific display corresponding to a variable display, and to be able to execute change effects for changing a display mode of the specific display. For example, in Patent Document 1, a specific display (for example, a hold display) is displayed in a special mode that suggests that the display mode changes, and a change effect of a white arrow flying is performed, and a white arrow is displayed in the specific display. It is described that the special mode is changed to the special mode if it is pierced, and the special mode is displayed as it is unless the white arrow is pierced in the specific display.

JP, 2014-168556, A (paragraph 0365-0368, FIG. 43)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the specific display does not change from the special mode to the special mode, the special mode is displayed as it is, and there is a risk that the rendering effect in the case of executing the change effect may be reduced. .

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can prevent the fall of the presentation effect at the time of performing change presentation.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is a specific display capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, which may be an active display) corresponding to the variable display. Change presentation that changes the display mode of the specific display after the specific display is displayed by means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold) (For example, a part that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) capable of executing (for example, pending announcement effect with action effect) The execution means, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, displays the display mode of the specific display in a second aspect (for example, a high degree of advantage) It is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns 405 to 45 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I) In the case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, together with the suspension notice effect based on S414 is executable) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the mode to the third mode (for example, normal retention) (for example, based on change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. The specific display displayed by the third mode has a lower rate of changing to the second mode than the specific display displayed by the first mode (for example, FIG. As shown in 0 and FIG. 41, the change pattern that changes from special hold to normal hold and then changes to red hold is selectable only when the first hold memory number is 4 and the super reach jackpot at the start winning combination There are only change patterns 411 and 414, there are very few allocations of judgment values, and change patterns 31, 32, and 401 to 404, which do not change as they are normally reserved, have more judgment values allocated. After that, it may not change to red retention), and further, a launcher capable of launching game media based on the player's operation (for example, a bat operating handle or a bat launching device); While controlling the progress of the game, when the power supply is stopped after receiving the power supply, the game state recovery processing (for example, Sa 904 in the game control main processing) Firing the game medium so as to flow down a first control means (for example, CPU 90103) capable of executing 1 to Sa 9048) and a specific path (for example, right game area 9010R) of the flow-down paths for the game medium to flow down Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a prompt display (for example, right-handed notification image) for promoting the display and a recovery display (for example, power failure recovery screen) regarding the recovery process; Are different means, and are transmitted from the first control means, and the notification means (for example, the right-handed notification LED 9030) capable of promoting notification to promote firing the game medium to flow down the specific route Information on the display means based on the information (for example, the right-handed LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and the game state specification command in the first modification) A second control unit (for example, CPU for effect control 90120) to control is provided, and the second control unit can perform control to display a prompt display together with a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. 92) The effect control CPU 90120 is a part that displays a power failure recovery screen and a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 by executing the right-handed notification processing and the power failure recovery screen display processing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering. Further, when the gaming state is restored, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

(Means 2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display or an active display) may be displayed. The display mode of the specific display is displayed after the specific display is displayed by the possible specific display means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold). Change effect executing means capable of executing change effect to be changed (for example, pending announcement effect with action effect) (for example, a portion for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, S8106 to S8114 in the effect control microcomputer 100) In the second aspect, the change effect execution means, as the change effect, displays the specific display according to the first mode, and then displays the display mode of the specific display with a high degree of advantage. It is possible to execute an effect of changing to (for example, blue hold or red hold) (for example, change shown in change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I) In the case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the first mode as the change effect, together with the reserve announcement effect based on the patterns 405 to S414). It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the display to the third mode (for example, normal hold) (for example, change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and change patterns 401 to 401 shown in FIG. The specific indication displayed by the third aspect is lower in advantage than the specific indication displayed by the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 39). If you change from special hold to normal hold (normal hold (with special hold)), the percentage of super reach jackpots or super reach deviations compared to blue hold or red hold Low, and a high percentage of non-reach is lost). Furthermore, it controls the progress of the game by means of launcher (eg, a bat operating handle or a bat launching device) capable of firing game media based on the player's operation. The first control means (for example, the CPU 90103) capable of executing recovery processing (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main processing) when receiving power supply after stopping power supply, and gaming media flow down Promotion indication (for promoting firing game media to flow down a specific path (for example, right gaming area 9010R) of the flow down paths For example, a display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a right-handed notification image) and a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) related to recovery processing is a means different from the display means Notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 9030) capable of promoting notification for promoting the game medium to be discharged down the route, and information transmitted from the first control means (for example, in the embodiment) A second control unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for controlling the display on the display unit based on the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command and the gaming state specification command in the first modification; It is possible for the means to control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. Wherein the effect display device 905 part for displaying the power interruption recovery screen and right-handed notification image on) that by executing the knowledge processing and power interruption recovery screen display process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering. Further, when the gaming state is restored, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the change presentation execution means may be configured to display the specific display in the normal mode (for example, normal hold) as the first mode (see FIG. 52). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

(Means 4) In means 1 or 2, the change presentation executing means displays the specific indication in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode (for example, FIG. In the case of executing the on-hold notice effect based on the change patterns 31 to 36 shown in E) and the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold may be displayed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, the change presentation executing means is an action presentation (for example, FIG. 50 (5) or the like) performed by the aspect acting on the specific display displayed in the first aspect. It is possible to execute a change effect including the operation effect shown in FIG. 50 (8), FIG. 51 (5), and FIG. 51 (8) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the process selected in step S8010). By executing steps S8013 and S8105 in accordance with the table, the effect presentation can be executed a plurality of times on the specific display displayed in the first mode of 1). In the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the second hold shift In the iming, although the effect presentation is executed, the special presentation does not change, and the operation presentation is executed at the timing of the third suspension shift and can be changed from the special suspension to the normal suspension) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display of the specific display displayed in the first mode The degree of advantage is higher than when the aspect changes to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change pattern 411, in which red hold is finally displayed even if the special hold returns from normal hold) 414) may be provided, and the change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot. According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third aspect can be enhanced.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6, limiting means for limiting the number of specific displays displayed in the third mode (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 It may be configured to include steps S6005X, S6007X, S6009, and S6010). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game when the change effect is executed.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to 7, the specific display means is at least a normal aspect (for example, "white") and a first specific aspect (for example, "Red" and any of the second specific modes (eg, the first special suggestion mode (the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, the SP suggestive mode)) indicating the content of the effect The specific display can be displayed by the display mode (for example, in the third embodiment, steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Effect executing means capable of executing effects of contents suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect (for example, third part) In the embodiment, the special zone rendition, the pseudo ream, and the like are performed by executing the processing similar to steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in the processing similar to steps S8010 and S8011 in microcomputer for effect control 100. And the part capable of performing super reach effect), and the specific display means displays the specific display according to the second specific aspect, and then the presentation of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is executed ( For example, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific display from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, the display mode after 5 seconds when the effect of the suggested content is performed) (for example, in the third embodiment) The control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714. When one of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern by executing, the first display or the active display, which is displayed in the second display mode, is indicated as the first indication. It may be configured to be changeable to "red" which is an aspect). According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the specific aspect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (means 9)-(means 16) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in the gaming machine, when power is again supplied after the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, as disclosed in JP-A-2002-143523, a variable display (display means) is used. There has been a display indicating that the gaming state is a specific gaming state, together with the fact that recovery from the state where power is not supplied is restored (restoration of the gaming state). However, in the above-described gaming machine, when the gaming state is restored, it is not displayed on the variable display device (display means) which one of the plurality of paths through which the gaming medium can flow. , There was a problem that the player may be disadvantaged. In view of this point, there is a demand for provision of a gaming machine capable of reducing the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of (means 9) according to another aspect is:
(Means 9) A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, game ball) (for example, a pachinko machine 901), and a shooting means (for example, for example) capable of firing the game medium based on the operation of the player , Control the progress of the game, and the game state recovery processing (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main process) when power supply is received after stopping the power supply Promotion to promote firing game media to flow down a specific path (for example, right gaming area 9010 R) of possible first control means (for example, CPU 90103) and a flow down path through which game media flow down Display means (for example, effect display device) capable of displaying a display (for example, a right-handed notification image) and a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) related to a recovery process 05) and notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 9030) which is different from the display means and capable of promoting notification for promoting the game medium to be discharged to flow down the specific route. Second control means (control means for controlling display on the display means based on information transmitted from the first control means (for example, right turn notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment, gaming state specification command in the modification 1) For example, the effect control CPU 90120) is included, and the second control means can perform control to display the prompt display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 92, the effect control CPU 90120 is right By executing the hit notification processing and the power failure recovery screen display processing to display the power failure recovery screen and the right hit notification image on the effect display device 905). It is set to.
According to this feature, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced when the gaming state is restored.

(Means 10) In the means 9, the second control means can control the notification by the notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processing of S90705 and S90708 and strikes right) A part to turn on the notification LED 9030, a part to execute the processing of S90711 and turn off the right notification LED 9030), and a specific route notification execution command to execute the promotion notification by the notification means from the first control means Based on the above, control is performed to display the promotion display and the recovery display on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the right turn notification LED lighting specification command in the processing of S90704 and S90707). S90705 and S90706, or S90708 and S90 when it is determined that there is Executing the processing of 09, and a right-handed, wherein the portion to start) the display of the annunciation image on the lighting and effect display device 905 right-handed informing LED9030.
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the prompting display on the display means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands.

(Means 11) In the means 9 or the means 10, the first control means can transmit a command to the second control means at transmission timings at predetermined time intervals (for example, as shown in FIG. The command control process (S9020) of the game control timer interruption process shown in the part to transmit the command to the effect control board 12 (CPU 90120 for effect control), which is a command different from the specific route notification execution command, A recovery command (for example, a power failure recovery designation command) notifying that the gaming state has been recovered is transmitted at the transmission timing at the same predetermined time interval as the specific route notification execution command (for example, the game control main process shown in FIG. 74) Of right turn on notification LED lighting specification command and power failure recovery specification command in Sa9046 and Sa9048 To transmit the right turn on notification LED lighting specification command and the power failure recovery specification command by executing command control processing in the same timer control processing for game control. There is.
According to this feature, when the display start time of the recovery display and the display start time of the promotion display are different, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the promotion display being missed.

(Means 12) In any one of means 9 to 11, the display means and the notification means are means different from the display means and the notification means, and can emit light to notify that the path where the game medium should be fired is the specific path. Light emitting means (eg, first special symbol display 904A, second special symbol display 904B, normal symbol display 9020, first hold display 9025A, second hold display) The first control means is capable of controlling the light emission and extinguishment of the light emitting means, and causes the notification means to start the promotion notification in accordance with the light emission control of the specific route corresponding light emission part. Control for transmitting a specific route notification execution command for the game (for example, the CPU 90 While performing transmission setting of right turn notification LED lighting specification command in processing of Sa9047 and processing of S90302 and S90303 of big hit opening processing shown in FIG. 83, a portion to turn right display portion 9025D), specific route correspondence Control is performed to transmit a specific route notification execution command to end the promotion notification in the notification means along with the light emission control of the light emitting unit (for example, S90196 and S90197 of the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. In the process of S90316a and S90316b of the big hit end process shown in the process of S90251 and S90252 of the small hit end process shown in FIG. It is characterized in that the part to be turned off).
According to this feature, since the light emission state of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit and the promotion notification in the notification unit become interlocked, the promotion notification in the notification unit can be appropriately performed.

(Means 13) In Means 9, based on the reception of the recovery command notifying that the gaming state has been restored from the first control means, control is performed to display the promotion display and the recovery display on the display (for example, As shown in the first modification, a part that displays a power failure recovery screen or a right-handed notification image on the effect display device based on the gaming state specified by the CPU for effect control 90120 from the power failure recovery designation command received by the CPU 90103). It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the prompting display on the display means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands.

(Means 14) In any one of means 9 to 13, the first state (for example, the closed state) where the gaming medium can not win or difficult to win and the second state where the gaming medium is easier to win than the first state For example, the variable winning device (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B) which can be changed to the open state and provided on the specific route, and the game medium is variable winning A game value giving unit capable of giving a predetermined game value based on winning in a device (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes a winning ball process (S9012) in a game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75); And the first control means can control the variable winning device to the second state in the advantageous state, and the gaming state recovered by the first control means is in the advantageous state. A display to the effect that the winning device changes to the second state can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the process of S90625 of the power failure recovery screen display process shown in FIG. The part that displays the image while the big winning opening is open)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable winning device changes to the second state in which the game medium can be won when the gaming state is restored, thereby reducing the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can do.

(Means 15) Abnormality judging means capable of judging abnormalities corresponding to a plurality of kinds of events having different priorities in any of means 9 to 14 (for example, each error (abnormality shown in FIG. 77 by CPU 90103) (A part that executes abnormality determination processing to determine the occurrence of a), and when the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, the notification is made when the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified Error notification means for giving notification about the determined abnormality (for example, when it is determined in S90407 of the main side error processing that an error with a higher priority than an error being notified, the game stop flag is set) If not, an error designation command of a high priority error is transmitted to the effect control board 9012, for effect control of the effect control board 9012. In the error notification process executed by the PU 90120, the error notification of the high priority error is executed instead of the error notification that has already been executed, based on the fact that abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining unit). The state control means (for example, the part which makes the game ball stop state by the CPU 90103 prohibiting the firing of the game ball in S90411) to control to the state corresponding to the determined abnormality, and the abnormality notifying means is the state control When a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the means is a predetermined state (for example, the game stop state in which the game stop flag is set), the priority of the abnormality is different. Notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state is continued (for example, in S90407 of the main side error processing) If the game stop flag is set when an error having a priority higher than that of the known error is determined, the error designation command of the high priority error is not transmitted to the effect control board 9012, It is characterized in that the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 continues the notification of the error that is already being executed, without executing the error notification of the error with the high priority.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent that the event that is triggered to be controlled to the predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm.

(Means 16) In any of the means 9 to the means 15, the second control means can display a plurality of options (for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (B) as the modification 2), the effect display device 905 The display of a plurality of options is ended when any option is selected from a plurality of options). Together with control execution means for executing control according to the selected option (for example, as shown in the second modification, the player or the like operates the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A to select any one of the options). By selecting and performing the determination operation, the display of the image shown in FIG. 98 (B) is finished, and the effect display device 905 displays a table of the image as a big hit game effect. , BGM according to the determined option is output from the speakers 908 L, 908 R), the control execution means, when the power supply is stopped while displaying the plurality of options, when the power supply is resumed, Control according to a predetermined one of a plurality of options is executed (for example, as shown in the second modification, in the state where it is not determined which BGM is to be output, power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is In the case where the supply is stopped, when power is again supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901, one BGM (the music C in the present modification 2) of the options displayed in FIG. 98 (B) is used as the speaker 908L, It is characterized in that it is determined as the BGM to be output from 908R, and the portion to start the output from the speakers 908L and 908R of the determined BGM.
According to this feature, when power supply is stopped in a state where a plurality of options are displayed, regardless of which of the plurality of options is selected, when power supply is resumed, Since the control according to the predetermined option is executed, the processing can be reduced.

  The present invention may have only the invention-specifying matters described in the claims of the invention, and has configurations other than the invention-specifying matters together with the invention-specifying matters described in the claims of the invention. It may be something.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation notice production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect presentation determination table. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of pending | preceding advance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of pending | preceding advance production. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of the suspension notice effect in the modification 1; FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of the suspension notice effect in the modification 2; It is a flow chart which shows a reservation notice production setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a pending | holding change pattern determination table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the selection ratio of red pending | holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. (A) is an explanatory view showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table, and (C) is an explanatory view showing a pseudo continuous suggestion execution lottery table (D) is an explanatory view showing an SP suggested execution lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation in a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a pending | holding display in the 2nd special suggestion mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a pending | holding display in the 2nd special suggestion mode in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view showing a game machine in an example. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), (C) is a big hit type determination table (second special symbol (D) is an explanatory view showing a small hit classification determination table, and (E) is an explanatory view showing contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning prize ball device. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main side error process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the priority of various errors and error, cancellation | release conditions, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right-handed notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power failure restoration screen display process. It is a figure which shows the display mode at the time of restoring from vibration detection 1 error detection in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the display mode when it recovers from vibration detection 1 error detection in a small hit gaming state. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process according to Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right-handed notice processing in modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows an example of electric power failure restoration screen display processing in modification 1. It is a figure which shows the display mode and the output mode of BGM when it recovers from the power failure in BGM selection of a big hit game.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 121 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. . In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the sum of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages instead of the first pending storage display unit 9a and the second pending storage display unit 9b. An area (total holding storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total holding storage number).

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probable change state) when becoming a probability change big hit, and the game ball becomes easy to get started (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect) A transition is made to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled such that execution conditions of variable display in the display device 9 are easily established) (in this embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power source discharges and the backup power source can not supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  The effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 provided in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120, as described later. (See FIG. 3), but illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 13). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process May be performed in

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as non-reach pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is non-reach The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-2 is prepared. Among them, non-reach PA 1-1 is a fluctuation pattern without reach and without pseudo reciprocation or slip rendition, and is not a shortening fluctuation, and is a fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation (in this example, fluctuation time 12.50 seconds) It is. In addition, non-reach PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern without reach and without pseudo reunion and slip rendition, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation (in this example, fluctuation time 2 .00 seconds).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the non-reach is out, the case where the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo ream or the slip effect is not included is shown, but when the non-reach is out. Also, it may be configured to provide a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when using normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB 2-4, Super PA 3-3-Super PA 3-4, Super PB 3-3-Super PB 3-4, Special PG 1-1-Special PG 1-3, Special PG 2-1-Special PG 2-2 fluctuation pattern Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-representation, which is used when the sudden variation is not a big hit or a small hit, when using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of the sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), five judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit category determination table 131b, one decision value is assigned to "sudden oddity big hit" (a ratio of 1/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit state (see step S 167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). In addition, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a definite change state and also to a short time state. Step S169, which will be described later). See S170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  Note that the aspect of sudden positive jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the opening number of the big winning opening may be 15 times (15 rounds) the same as that of the big hit or sudden odd variation big hit normally, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be made extremely short such as 0.1 second.

  In this embodiment, even in the case of "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by "suddenly positive variation big hit" is performed. It will be. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is not necessary to provide a small hit, when it is comprised so that all the big hit types may be a definite variation big hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big winning opening be made the same for the big hit and the small hit suddenly.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, according to the jackpot type determination result, a fluctuation pattern type, a random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, which is normal CA 3-1 to normal CA 3-2, Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of the super CA 3-3, the special CA 4-1, and the special CA 4-2 are set.

  For example, the variation pattern type determination table 132A for big hit shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normally big hit”, and FIG. 9 (B) used when the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in, the allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least Super Reach (Super Reach A, Super Reach B) is performed.

  In addition, for super reach big hit, fluctuation pattern type with pseudo ream (fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns of super PA3-3, super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern type without pseudo ream (super PB3-3, super And the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, a variation pattern type with a super reach and a pseudo run, a super reach and a pseudo run, in both the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal hit and the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B. A variation pattern type not to be accompanied is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation big hit" The judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type being "suddenly odd change big hit", it is different from the case where the big hit state due to the big hit or positive hit is usually controlled. It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, when it is determined that the variable display result is made a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number (random 2) for change pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows a change pattern type determination table for disengagement 135C used when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a disappointing pattern, a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for loss are used based on random numbers (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of

  In each of the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of the random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type judgment, which are non reach CA2-1 to non reach CA2-1. 2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-3 to normal CA2-4 and super CA2-5 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination Is 230-251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern type If 1 is 1 to 89, fluctuation display of normal fluctuation without at least reach (without a rendition such as pseudo ream or slip effect) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storages (non-reach CA 2-1) Since it becomes a fluctuation pattern classification of, it turns out that it becomes a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA-1 of non-reach normal fluctuation, as shown in Drawing 12 mentioned below. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A, 135B) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (the variation pattern with the reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, the total pending storage number) A common judgment value (1 to 89 in the example shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. Note that “variable display patterns other than reach variable display patterns”, as described in this embodiment, for example, do not involve reach, do not accompany effects such as pseudo-trains or slip effects, and the variable display results It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "big hit" or "small hit", the change pattern determination is performed according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of CA4-1 and the special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect pattern is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the "big hit".

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A determines that the variable display result is “off” based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to decide fluctuation pattern in either of multiple types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has increased or decreased for the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (the first pending storage number addition designation Although the case where the command, the second pending storage number addition designation command, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command, and the second pending storage number subtraction designation command are transmitted is shown, the form of the pending storage information is the same as in this embodiment. For example, pending storage information may be transmitted as follows.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased is specified, and the number of pending storages of the increased one (The first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has been specified in that one command, and the total pending storage count is EXT data May be set and transmitted.

(3) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The increased number of pending storages (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is the effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the judgment results when winning. is there. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see FIG. 22) described later, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit or not, the type of big hit It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the winning-time effect processing described later that the “off” is to occur, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes a “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is, and which display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning combination A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is normal and off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number will be 1 to 89 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the judgment values 1 to 89 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type becomes the non-reach CA2-1 based on the change category 1 command being received. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type is super CA2-5 based on the reception of the change category 7 command.

  Specifically, the threshold values 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above variation categories belongs to the removal shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). The values are derived by picking up values that can be the boundaries of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the subsequent variation categories 8 to 9 and 21 to 29, and they are assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that may be a boundary of the range of the determined value.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state becomes a definite variation state or a short time state and a departure at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not .about.219. If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (that is, if it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CA2-2), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation as “07 (H)” in the EXT data Send category 8 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “08 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5) Send variation category 9 command.

  Note that, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 may be allocated to the range of the determination value 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is a disconnection, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the determination processing of the gaming state in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation data in which “10 (H)” is set to the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3). Send variation category 23 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes “probable big hit” at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “13 (H)” as the variation category Send 24 commands. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3) Send variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning presentation processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “16 (H)” as the variation category 27 Send a command. Next, if the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “17 (H)” as the variation category Send 28 commands.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same between when the winning determination is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command It may also occur that the pattern type does not match the fluctuation pattern type actually used in the fluctuation display. However, in this embodiment, for at least non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3 variation pattern types, common judgment values are allocated regardless of the total number of pending storages. There is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Therefore, in this embodiment, the pending advance notice effect, which is a type of advance notice effect, is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning to become the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 or super CA3-3. Ru. The variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, only when it is determined to be the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3. The variation category 7 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of the winning determination result of the other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it becomes other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5 and super CA3-3, even if it transmits fluctuation category command which shows that fluctuation pattern classification can not be specified. Good.

  Note that “pre-reading advance notice effect” is an advance notice effect that is executed prior to the start of the variable display targeted for the notice effect. In this embodiment, as described later, when it is decided to execute the on-hold notice effect which is a type of advance notice effect when the start-up winning occurs, the on-hold display is normally performed (in this example, a white circle is displayed). And a final notice effect to be finally changed to a special display mode different from the above (in this example, a blue or red circular display). In this embodiment, when the hold notification effect is executed, the hold display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the hold display is a special display mode (in this example, a triangle display or a rectangular display) The effect presentation is executed at the timing of the subsequent suspension shift, and presentation may be performed in which the suspension display of the advance notice object changes to any of the special display modes. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as “normal hold”, and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as “special hold”. The hold display displayed in the blue display color of the special display mode is also referred to as "blue hold", and the hold display displayed in the red display color is also referred to as "red hold".

  In addition to the reserved preview effects, the presentation mode of the preview advance notice effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and, for example, as a preview advance notice effect, the special display result such as the chance eye symbol continuously over plural variations Perform various effects such as performing an effect to stop display, performing an effect such as counting down over a plurality of changes, or performing an effect of changing the effect mode in such a manner that the background screen changes Is considered.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, a case is shown where the on-hold notice effect is executed so that only the display mode of the on-hold display can be changed, but, for example, the variable display currently being executed is displayed In the gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the display mode, even if the pending display is digested and the variable display of the advance object becomes in execution, the display mode of the active display can also be changed It may be configured.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, if the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214A) . In the process of step S1214A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the time-shortening flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-shortening state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize effect processing is executed to determine in advance the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step) (step S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218A) and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning on first start winning opening 13 occurs and a winning at-a-time effect process of step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  However, if it is determined in step S 1215 A or step S 1216 A that Y was not determined to be executed in step S 1217 A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first pending storage count addition specification command in step S 1220 A. Control is not performed to transmit the determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) at the time of winning. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed, a value indicating the incompletion determination result can not be specified (for example, "FF (H)") is set as the EXT data specification result specification A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1215A, the winning of step S1217A is performed only when the gaming state is the normal state. The hour effect process is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1216A, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. At the time of winning the effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not shift to step S 1217 A only in the big hit gaming state, and may shift to step S 1217 A to execute the prize effect processing in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control that the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening of the final round is finished and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending opening). Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S1211 B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214B) . In the process of step S1214B, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218 B), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218 B and S1219 B, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the second start winning opening 14 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217 B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1218 B to S1220 B and the winning at presentation processing of step S1217 B is executed, symbol designation is performed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  In the second start port switch passage processing, the same processing as step S1215A is performed, and if time saving state (including control to be in time saving state as well as positive change state) is executed, the effect processing in step S1217B is executed. You may not do. That is, only when it is the normal state, the winning a prize production process of step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command. In this embodiment, as described later, since the prefetch advance notice effect is executed only for the second hold storage when in the time saving state, conversely, only when it is in the time saving state, the time of winning of step S1217B Perform rendering processing to transmit symbol designation command and variation category command, and if it is in the normal state, do not execute symbol presentation command in step S1217B and do not send symbol designation command and variation category command It is also good.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as step S1216A may be performed, and when in the big hit game, the effect process at the time of winning in step S1217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passing processing, it is possible not to execute the winning a prize production processing of step S1217 B (that is, it is possible not to perform the winning a prize determination processing for the second special symbol) . With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the preview notice effect from being interrupted halfway because the fluctuation time is short when the prefetch notice effect is performed for a certain period of time.

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a prize-time effect process of steps S1217A and S1217B. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of any judgment value by executing the winning presentation process. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed, and the microcomputer for effect control is based on the judgment result at the time of winning as described later. Execute a pending advance notice effect to predict that it will be a big hit or a super reach during the change display of the production design by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is the high probability state (probable change state) Whether or not it is confirmed (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit has occurred before, it changes from the normal state to the positive change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the in-winning effect processing of step S 1217 A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hitting determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing at step S1217 B), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines in step S225 whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state and whether or not the time saving state (specifically, whether the positive change flag and the time saving flag are set) Determine In addition, after confirming whether or not the vehicle is in the definite variation state and the time saving state in step S225 at the start winning combination, a plurality of variable displays are actually started until the variation display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is a definite change state and whether it is a short time state at the start winning combination, until the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. (For example, when a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, it may change from the normal state to the positive change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of any determination value by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219). Determines that “07 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When it is not the threshold 219 or less (that is, when it is 220-251), it is determined that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU sets thresholds 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 89 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 89 (that is, 1 to 89). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 169 or less (ie, 100 to 169), it is determined to set “02 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined to set "03 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (ie, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "04 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (i.e., if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "06 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are determined in ascending order of the threshold value, so the one determined with the later order threshold is the previous one. It does not fall within the range below the order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 99 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 89 which is less than or equal to the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Also, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in order of decreasing threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, 199, in order of decreasing threshold value. It may be determined as 169, 99 and 89. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold in the normal state may always be set without performing the determination of the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern type for “non-reach out” and the variation pattern type for “super reach”, so “non-reach It can be determined whether or not it becomes "off" or "super reach".

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be a symbol designation command A process of setting to is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a small hit threshold (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251, and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at-step presentation processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8D). Using the special symbol) 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing process at step S1217 B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) Using 131 b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that "normal big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "normal big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "certain variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" is found, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "sudden change probability big hit" will be made as a symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for big hit according to the big hit classification determined at Step S229 (Step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it determines that "normal big hit". In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In addition, when it is not the threshold value 149 or less (ie, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set "12 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the “probable big hit” is made, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability big hit", the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 100 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 100 (i.e., 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228 and S231 and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which of the values of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment It is determined whether the range is the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the set fluctuation pattern type in step S232. The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result as a variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 selects one of “00 (H)” to “08 (H)”, “10 (H)”, and “10 (H)” as shown in FIGS. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although it is not shown up to which variation pattern type specifically the microcomputer 100 for effect control, it is indicated that the variation pattern type comprehensively becomes any of the big hit variation pattern types On the basis of the reception of the category command, an on-hold notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  FIG.23 and FIG.24 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 or not (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, but in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, for example. It may be configured.

  In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol is performed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning a prize processing process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the big hit determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and the value may not be compared with the big hit determination value in the positive change state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is performed , And the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, it is between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual change. Deviation can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the pending storage number subtraction designated command (the first pending storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control in the order of the designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command). Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A) as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9 (D (FIG. 9 (D)) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (100 times with this execution form) ends. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A (as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern as any of a plurality of types). FIG. 10A is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Step 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in this embodiment, the time change state is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Are also transferred (see steps S169 and S170), and if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the type of variation pattern type if there is a probability change state or if it is controlled to only the time saving state). As a table used to determine one of the plurality of types, the release variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation for disconnection shown in FIG. 10 (B). Pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, a variation pattern type determination table for omission 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-2 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-2 is determined, the change is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in a definite variation state or a short time state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories (see FIG. Although the case where it is a table different from 10 (B) is shown, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B as a table used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100 (see FIG. 11). And the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) are selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 13) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Note that whether or not the pending storage number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction specification command has been sent when sending the pending storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag may be set, and it may be checked in step S1121 whether the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Next, if the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 56 performs control to send the pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, is a probability variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, a time shortening flag indicating that it is a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is normally a big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (that is, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S169) and sets a short time flag to shift to a short time condition (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 5 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the received symbol designation command is the first in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area where the newest design specification command is stored (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number addition designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 executes the received first hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning combination command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area where the command is stored (step S626). However, when the gaming state is in a definite variation state, a short time state, a big hit gaming state, or a small hit gaming state, the symbol designating command and the variation category command are not transmitted, but only the first reserve memory number adding designating command is transmitted. (See steps S1215A to S1219A). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the received first pending storage number addition designation command is available in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store in the first storage area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the normal mode (in this example, a white circle in this example) in the first hold memory display 9a, and the first hold in the first hold memory display 9a. The memory number display is updated (step S627). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds one to the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S 628).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number addition designation command (step S629), the effect control CPU 101 executes the received second hold memory number addition designation command in the start winning combination command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area where the command is stored (step S630).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display section 9b in the normal mode (in this example, a white round display in this example), and the second hold storage display section 9b The memory number display is updated (step S631). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds one to the value of the second pending storage number stored in the second pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S633), the CPU 101 for production control erases one hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a, and the remaining hold display is 1 It shifts one by one to update the first pending storage number display in the first pending storage display unit 9a (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number subtraction designation command (step S636), the CPU 101 for production control erases one hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b, and the remaining hold display is 1 It shifts each time and updates the 2nd pending storage number display in the 2nd pending storage indicator 9b (Step S637). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the second pending storage number stored in the second pending storage number saving area formed in the RAM (step S638).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S639), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to have a background screen according to the normal state (for example, blue display color) It changes to background screen) (step S640). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the time saving state flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is a short time state background designation command (step S642), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background screen according to the short time state (for example, green display color It changes to background screen) (step S643). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (step S644). If the effect control CPU 101 is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a positive change state flag indicating that the gaming state is a positive change state (step S645).

  If the received effect control command is a definite variation state background designation command (step S646), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background screen according to the probable variation state (for example, red display color It changes to background screen) (step S647). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change state flag (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation specification command (step S649), the effect control CPU 101 sets a first symbol variation specification command reception flag (step S650). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation specification command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 sets a second symbol variation specification command reception flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S653). For example, if the received effect control command is a big hit start designated command, the big hit start designated command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is a big hit end designated command, the big hit end designated command received flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a pending notification effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of the pending notification effect and the change pattern (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing on-hold notice effect setting processing (step S800A). In the holding advance notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs one set of start winning combination commands (that is, a symbol specifying command, a change category command, and a holding memory number addition specifying command (first holding memory number addition specification command) Alternatively, it is checked whether or not a set of second pending storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variation category command, and pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or second pending storage number addition designation command) are included in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether it is newly stored. If one set of start winning combination commands has not been received anew, the process ends.

  If one set of start winning combination commands has been newly received, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the probability change status flag or the time saving status flag is set (step S6002). If the probability change status flag or the time saving status flag is set (that is, if it is a probability changing status or a time saving status), the process ends.

  If neither the probability change status flag nor the time saving status flag is set (ie, in the normal status), the effect control CPU 101 receives a newly stored pending memory count addition designation command (newly in the command storage area for start winning). It is checked whether or not the pending storage number addition designation command stored in (1) is the first pending storage number addition designation command (step S6003). If it is not the case where the first pending storage number addition designation command has been newly received (that is, if the second pending storage number addition designation command has been newly received), the processing is ended as it is.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 and S6003, in this embodiment, only when a start winning for the first start winning opening 13 newly occurs while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, The processing after step S6004 is executed, and it is configured to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect.

  In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, it is possible to execute the on-hold notice effect even when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs while being controlled to the definite variation state or the time saving state. You may configure it.

  Further, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the gaming state is a normal state, Regardless of whether or not it is a definite change state or a short time state, and regardless of which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is a start winning prize, it is possible to execute the holding notice effect You may configure it.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the first number of pending storages is 2 or more (step S6004). Note that whether or not the first number of pending storages is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the number of first pending storages stored in the first number of pending storages area (see steps S628 and S635). . If the first pending storage number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first pending storage number is 1), the process ends.

  In this embodiment, when executing the reserve announcement effect, the display of the reserve display is started according to the normal mode at the start winning prize, and then the reserve display is changed to special reserve, blue reserve, or red reserve at the timing of reserve shift. Although there is only one first pending storage number at the start winning timing, if there is a pending shift of the first pending storage, then the pending is immediately taken over and the variable display is performed. From there, there is no room to carry out the pending announcement effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S6004 that the first pending storage number is not 2 or more, it is determined that the on-hold notice effect can not be executed, and the process is ended as it is.

  In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, in the case where the blue hold or red hold is immediately displayed at the timing of the start winning and the execution of the hold notice effect can be started, the first hold memory Even if the number is 1, the process may proceed to the process of step S6005 or later to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect.

  Also, for example, in the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the currently-displayed variable display by the display mode that has taken over the display mode of the hold display, Since it is also possible to change the display mode, even if the first number of pending storages is 1, the process may proceed to the processing of step S6005 and subsequent steps so as to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect.

  If the first pending storage number is two or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the latest pending display based on the received latest variation category command and the first pending storage number (step S6005). . In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final display mode determination table for determining the final display mode of the latest pending display based on the latest variation category command and the first pending storage number. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the final display mode determination table, as the final display mode of the hold display, normal hold (without special hold), normal hold (with special hold), blue Judgment values are assigned to hold and red hold, respectively. Among these, “normally reserved (with special suspension)” means that temporarily changed to special suspension at the timing of the suspension shift after the starting winning combination, and then, at the timing of the subsequent suspension shift, the vehicle would normally be normally suspended. It is a return, and the final display mode itself is normally on hold, but the on-hold notice effect is executed. On the other hand, “normal hold (without special hold)” does not change to special hold at all, and does not change as normal hold until the hold is digested and the hold indication is erased, It corresponds to the one that does not execute the presentation itself.

  When the first number of pending storages is 2, there is only one opportunity to change the pending display at the timing of the pending shift after the starting winning combination, so there is room to temporarily change the pending display to special pending. Absent. Therefore, in the final display mode determination table for the first number of pending storages “2” shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, only for normal retention (without special retention), blue retention, and red retention The judgment value is allocated to each, and there is no allocation of the judgment value to the normal hold (with special hold).

  In the case where the hold display can be changed a plurality of times during one variable display or the active display can be displayed, even if the first hold storage count is two, The special hold may be configured to be displayable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, when the change category indicated by the change category command is non-reach out, and super reach is out or super reach jackpot, it is possible to execute the hold notification effect. If it is configured, and the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category command is the other fluctuation category, the effect control CPU 101 sets the final display mode of the hold display as it is to “normal hold (without special hold)”. It decides and it decides not to execute reservation announcement production.

  If the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the change category indicated by the change category command is not In the case of reach out of range (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), select the final display mode determination table for 2 pending and non-reach out shown in FIG. If the category indicates a super reach loss (fluctuation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), select the 2 pending and super reach loss final display mode determination tables shown in FIG. If the indicated variation category indicates super reach jackpot (variation categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17), it is shown in FIG. 38 (C). Hold two and selects a final display mode decision table super reach jackpot. Further, when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the variation category command. If the variation category shown indicates non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode determination table for non-reach out and 3 to 4 shown in FIG. 39D is selected. If the variation category indicated by the variation category command is the one indicating the super reach loss (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode for 3 to 4 reservations and the super reach loss shown in FIG. 39 (E) Select the decision table, and the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates the super reach jackpot (variation categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17) If, for selecting a final display mode decision table for pending 3-4 and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 39 (F). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot, compared to the case of a non-reach loss, finally blue reserved rather than normal reserved. The rate of change to red hold is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold indication finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the degree of expectation for the super reach (reach reliability) is higher than in the case where the normal hold is finally finally put on hold. It's getting higher.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, it is finally blue than normal retention, as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to hold or red hold is high. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, it is finally redder than the blue reserve as compared with the case of the non reach out or the super reach out. The rate of change to pending is even higher. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is high when the pending display of the advance notice object is finally changed to red hold, and the case where it is finally changed to blue hold is the next big hit The degree of expectation (big hit reliability) for is high, and in the case of a final normal hold, the degree of expectation for big hit (big hit reliability) is low.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, it is assumed that the suspension notice effect can be executed when the winning determination result is non-reach out, super reach out, and super reach big hit. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when there is a fluctuation category that can be identified as becoming normal reach, the on-hold notice effect may be executable based on the determination result of winning being a normal reach loss or a normal reach jackpot.

  When it is decided not to execute the reserve announcement effect (N in step S6006), that is, when the final display mode is decided to be normal reserve (without special reserve via), or the variation category indicates super reach loss or super reach jackpot If not, the processing ends. When it is determined to execute the suspension notice effect (Y in step S6006), the effect control CPU 101 displays the suspension target of the notice object based on the received latest variation category command, the first number of suspended memories, and the final display mode. The change pattern of is determined (step S6007). In step S6007, the effect control CPU 101 selects a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the pending display of the notice target based on the latest variation category command, the first pending storage number, and the final display mode. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected change pattern determination table, and determines a change pattern of the pending display of the notice target.

  40 and 41 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table. In FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, special △ indicates special holding of triangular display, and special は indicates special holding of rectangular display.

  If the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue. If it is hold, the change pattern determination table for 2 hold and blue hold shown in FIG. 40 (A) is selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, it is shown in FIG. 40 (B) The change pattern determination table for 2 pending and red pending is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for 2 reservations and for blue retention so that the change pattern 21 is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), determination values are assigned to the change pattern determination table for the two reserved and red reserve patterns so that the change pattern 22 is determined with a probability of 100%. The change pattern 21 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the advance notice is changed to blue hold at the timing of the hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target at the start winning prize in the normal hold. Further, the change pattern 22 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the advance notice is changed to the red hold at the timing of the hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target at the start winning prize in the normal hold. That is, the fact that the first number of pending storages is "2" means that there is only one pending shift timing, and therefore the blue display or red pending of the final display mode as it is at the pending shift timing without passing through the special pending Change to

  Further, when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. If it is normal hold (with special hold), the three change table determination tables for holding and normal hold shown in FIG. 40C are selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold If the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, three hold and three hold shown in FIG. 40 (D) are selected. Select the change pattern determination table for red hold.

  As shown in FIG. 40C, in the change pattern determination table for the three pending and normal retention, determination values are allocated to the change pattern 31 and the change pattern 32, respectively. The change pattern 31 changes the hold display of the notice object to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the start winning combination. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to the normal pending again at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 32 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern that changes the hold indication of the advance notice object to the normal hold again at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), in the change pattern determination table for holding three pieces and the blue hold, determination values are allocated to the change pattern 33 and the change pattern 34, respectively. In the change pattern 33, after the display of the notice display of the advance notice is displayed as a normal hold at the starting winning combination, the change display of the notice display for notice is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to blue pending at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 34 displays the notice display of the notice object in normal hold at the start winning combination, and then changes the notice display of the notice object to special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the advance notice object to blue hold at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), in the change pattern determination table for the three red hold and red hold, determination values are allocated to the change pattern 35 and the change pattern 36, respectively. In the change pattern 35, after displaying the hold display of the advance notice in the normal hold at the start winning combination, change the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the advance notice object to red hold at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 36 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the advance notice object to red hold at the timing of the shift.

  Furthermore, when the first number of pending storages stored in the first pending storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “4”, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. Is the normal hold (with special hold), the change pattern determination table for the four hold and normal hold shown in FIG. 41F is selected, and the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold 41 (G), and select the change pattern determination table for four hold and blue hold. Also, if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red reserve, the variation category indicated by the variation category command further indicates non-reach loss or super reach loss (variation category 1 or variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16). If it is), select the change pattern determination table for 4 reservations and non-reach out / super reach out and red retention shown in FIG. 41 (H), and the change category indicated by the change category command indicates the super reach jackpot If it is one (the change categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), the change pattern determination table for the four hold and super reach big hit and red hold shown in FIG. 41 (I) is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (F), in the change pattern determination table for holding four and for normal holding, determination values are allocated to change pattern 401, change pattern 402, change pattern 403 and change pattern 404, respectively. ing. The change pattern 401 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to normal hold again at the timing, and the pending display of the advance object is displayed as normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 402 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the triangle display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 403 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is changed to normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the advance target is displayed as normal hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 404 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the rectangular display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing of the third pending shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (G), in the change pattern determination table for the four hold and blue hold, the determination values for the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, and the change pattern 408 are shown. It is allocated. The change pattern 405 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target at the start winning prize in the normal hold, and It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to the blue hold at the timing, and the pending display of the notice object is displayed as the blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 406 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as a special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the shift and the pending display of the notice target is changed to the blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 407 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to blue hold at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is displayed as the blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 408 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as a special hold of the rectangular display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing of the third pending shift.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), the change pattern determination table for 4 holding and non-reach out / super reach and red holding, and 4 holding and super reach big hit and red holding In the change pattern determination table, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, the change pattern 412, the change pattern 413, and the change pattern 414, respectively.

  The change pattern 409 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the start winning combination, and the second hold shift It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to red hold at the timing and the pending display of the notice object is displayed in red hold as it is at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 410 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the triangle display at the shift timing, and the pending display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 411 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is displayed in normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 412 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is displayed as red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 413 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice is displayed as the special hold of the rectangular display at the shift timing and the pending display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift. In addition, the change pattern 414 changes the hold display of the notice target to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the starting winning combination. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the advance notice object is displayed in normal hold again at the timing of the shift, and the pending display of the notice object is changed to red hold at the timing of the third pending shift.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, when the first number of pending storages is “4”, the pending display of the notice object is displayed as normal pending at the start winning, and the timing of the first pending shift is displayed. In the special hold, it is configured to be changeable to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold at the timing of the third and subsequent hold shifts. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth position in the first hold storage display section 9a (in the state after the start winning), it is displayed at the third position. When it is (the state after the first hold shift), the hold indication of the notice target does not change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E), in this embodiment, even when the first number of pending storages is “3”, the pending display of the notice object is normally displayed as pending at the start winning prize. Therefore, when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the third position in the first hold storage display unit 9a (the state after the start winning game), the hold display of the notice target is usually hold from special hold or It does not change to blue hold and red hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the period when the hold indication of the notice object is displayed at the fourth and third positions, the hold indication of the notice object is less likely to change from special hold to normal hold . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged from changing from special hold to normal hold at an early stage of the pending display of the advance notice object, and to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the on hold advance presentation effect. .

  In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, special hold, blue hold, and red hold can be displayed immediately upon winning the start, or special hold is displayed before waiting for the next hold shift. Immediately by carrying out the operation effect described later and by changing from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold, the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth or third position. Even during a certain period, the pending display of the notice target may be configured to be able to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold. However, even in the case of such a configuration, at least the pending display of the notice target changes from the special hold to the normal hold while the pending display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth or third position. It is preferable to configure so that the rate of change is low.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the effect presentation to be described later can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and even if the action effect is executed, the hold display of the notice target remains the special hold. And may change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 41F, after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the operation effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, and the special hold is performed. It can be changed to normal hold. Also, for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41F, after the special hold is displayed at the first hold shift timing, the effect presentation is executed at the second hold shift timing. The special hold does not change, and the effect presentation is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. As such, in this embodiment, not only when a special holding is returned to a normal holding in one operation effect, but also a plurality of effect effects may be executed to return from a special holding to a normal holding, It is possible to improve the rendering effect when executing the on-hold notice rendering.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E and FIGS. 41F to 41I, in this embodiment, two types of special hold of triangle display and special hold of rectangular display are used as special hold. However, when the special display of the rectangular display is displayed, the percentage of displaying the red display as the final display mode is higher than when the special display of the triangular display is displayed. . Also, conversely, when the special display of the triangle display is displayed, the ratio of returning to the normal display as the final display mode is higher than when the special display of the rectangular display is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 41H and 41I, in this embodiment, red hold is finally displayed even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold (ie, once it is returned to the normal hold, it is disappointing Then, the red reserve is changed and it appears as if it were displayed.) The change pattern (change patterns 411, 414) is provided, and the change pattern 411, 414 of this revival pattern is set only when it is a super reach jackpot. Judgment values are assigned to be determinable. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the red hold is finally made after the special hold is temporarily returned to the normal hold, the jackpot will be determined, rather than the red hold from the special hold. , The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

  It should be noted that the revival pattern change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined with low probability, even if the super reach is not the only one that determines the big hit if the revival pattern change patterns 411 and 414 are determined. May be At least, even when configured as such, if a special hold is once returned to a normal hold and then finally a red hold is made, it will be for a big hit than if a special hold is simply a red hold. It is sufficient if the degree of expectation (reliability) is high.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the change patterns 411 and 414 of the resurrection pattern are provided only when the final display mode is red hold is shown, but the same resurrection is also performed when the final display mode is blue hold You may comprise so that the change pattern of a pattern may be provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and (I), the determination result at the time of winning is non-reach out / super reach out or super reach jackpot only when there are four pending and red pending. Although the case where different change pattern determination tables are used depending on whether it is or not is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, change pattern determination tables for two or three reservations shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (E), 4 for holding shown in FIGS. 41 (F) and 41 (G) and for normal reservation or blue reservation The change pattern determination table may also be configured to use a different change pattern determination table according to the determination result at the time of winning. In this case, for example, in the case where the change pattern of the resurrection pattern is provided even when the final display mode is blue retention as described above, the non-reach / overlapping is performed by the mode similar to FIGS. It is configured to provide a change pattern determination table for reach loss and a change pattern determination table for super reach jackpot, and when a special hold temporarily returns to a normal hold and then finally becomes a blue hold, a big hit and May be determined, or the expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be configured to be high.

  Further, it may be further subdivided to separately provide a change pattern determination table for non-reach and a change pattern determination table for super-reach.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41H, as a change pattern determination table for four reservations and red retention, a table common to the case of non-reach and the case of super-reach. However, different change pattern determination tables may be used in the non-reach case and the super reach case.

  Furthermore, the example of the change patterns shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 is an example, and various change patterns may be provided. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the case of changing from the normal hold to the special hold at the timing of the first hold shift is shown, but the special hold is displayed from the start winning timing or A change pattern may also be provided to change from normal hold to special hold at the timing of the hold shift. Also, for example, a change pattern may be provided that changes to blue retention and then changes to red retention.

  Moreover, although FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 showed the case where only the change pattern in which the special holding of either triangular display or rectangular display is displayed, for example, the special holding of triangular display changes to the special holding of rectangular display Alternatively, it may be configured to provide a change pattern that changes from special storage of rectangular display to special storage of triangular display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the final display mode and the change pattern determined in the steps S6005 and S6007 in the pending advance effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM in association with the pending storage of the advance object (step S6008). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute on-hold notice effect in parallel to the plurality of on-hold displays displayed on the first on-hold storage display unit 9a, and the first on-hold storage display unit 9a can be performed at maximum. Since four hold displays can be displayed, four storage areas are provided in the hold notice effect setting information storage area, and the final display mode and the change pattern are stored in association with each hold storage. .

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that reminds of being in a definite variation state is also referred to as a definite variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that reminds of not becoming a definite variation condition is not definite symbol It is also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the probability variation state flag or the time saving state flag is set (step S8002). If neither the probability change status flag nor the time saving status flag is set (ie, in the normal status), the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is set ( Step S8003). If the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is set (that is, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started), the process moves to step S8004. That is, in this embodiment, as described above, since the on-hold notice effect is executed for the first on-hold storage when the gaming state is the normal state, the processing in steps S8002 and S8003 is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S8004 to S8010 is executed only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the display is changed to the suspension display for special notice and the special suspension, The effect presentation is configured to be executable.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not there is a display timing of special hold in the first hold storage (step S8004). In addition, whether or not there is a display timing of the special hold, for example, check the change pattern stored in the hold notification effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), start the current change (hold It can be determined by checking whether there is a normal hold → special Δ or special □ at the timing of shift). If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display at the special hold display timing to the special hold in the first hold storage display section 9a (step S8005). . In this case, when the change pattern is normal hold → special △, it is changed to special hold of triangle display, and when normal hold → special □, it is changed to special hold of rectangular display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 becomes an executable timing of an action effect (implemented in such a manner as to act on the pending display and suggesting that the display mode of the pending display changes) in the first pending storage. It is checked whether there is any (step S8006). It should be noted that whether or not it is an executable timing of the effect presentation, for example, check the change pattern stored in the storage area for holding announcement effect setting information storage (see step S6008), and start the current fluctuation start (hold shift). Special → → Special や or Special → → Normal hold, Special → → Blue hold, Special → → Red hold, Special □ → Special □, Special □ → Normal hold, Special □ → Blue hold, Special □ → Red hold It can be determined by checking whether there is any.

  The executable timing of the effect presentation is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and the operation presentation may be performed at other timings. For example, even when the normal hold changes to the special hold, it may be determined that the action effect can be executed, and the processing in step S8007 and subsequent steps may be performed to enable the action effect. Further, for example, a special effect may be provided when changing from normal hold to special hold, and even if the special effect is not changed to special hold (case effect effect) It may be configured to have

  If there is a timing at which action presentation can be performed in the first suspension storage, the effect control CPU 101 changes the suspension display as an action presentation determination table for determining the presence and the type of the action presentation. A table corresponding to the mode is selected (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected action effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of action effect (step S8008).

  In this embodiment, the plurality of pending displays displayed on the first pending storage display unit 9a are configured to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect in parallel. It may also occur when there are multiple executables at the same time. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the presence / absence and type of action effect with priority given to the ones for which fluctuation display is started earlier among the first suspension storages at which the action effect can be executed. The control effect is controlled to be performed only once during one change display. For example, when the first and third hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a are at the execution enable timing of the action effect, the first hold display is operated. If it is determined that the presence or absence and the type of the effect are to be performed, and the operation effect is to be executed, the operation effect is executed only for the first hold display.

  In addition, you may comprise not only the aspect shown in this embodiment, but performing operation presentation in multiple times during one fluctuation display, for example by shifting time and performing operation presentation. In addition, although the effect presentation is performed only once during one variation display, it is configured to execute the action presentation in such a manner that the one operation presentation acts on a plurality of suspension displays simultaneously. It is also good.

  45 and 46 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect presentation determination table. The effect control CPU 101 selects an action effect determination table for special Δ → normal hold shown in FIG. 45A at the timing when the special display of triangle display changes to normal hold based on the change pattern. In addition, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display changes to the normal storage, the special effect display table for special storage → normal storage shown in FIG. 45 (B) is selected. In addition, if it is a timing that does not change with the special display of triangular display as it is from the special display of triangular display, the effect presentation determination table for special Δ → special Δ shown in FIG. 45 (C) is selected. If it is a timing which does not change from the special display of the rectangular display as it is with the special display of the rectangular display, the action effect determination table for the special □ → special □ shown in FIG. 45 (D) is selected. If it is the timing at which the special display of the triangle display changes to the blue display, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → blue display shown in FIG. 46 (E) is selected. Further, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display changes to the blue display, an action / effect determination table for the special □ → blue display shown in FIG. 46 (F) is selected. If it is the timing at which the special display of the triangle display changes to the red display, the action effect determination table for the special Δ → red display shown in FIG. 46 (G) is selected. Further, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display changes to the red display, an action / effect determination table for the special □ → red display shown in FIG. 46 (H) is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in the effect presentation determination table, determination values are assigned to no effect presentation, action presentation A, action presentation B and action presentation C, respectively. In this embodiment, although there are three types of effect effects A to C as types of effect effects, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, only two types of effect effects may be used. You may comprise, or you may comprise so that four or more types of effect presentation may be used.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in this embodiment, when the action effect A is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of change from special hold to normal hold is high. In addition, when the action effect B is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of non-change with the special hold is high. In addition, when the action effect C is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of change from special hold to blue hold or red hold is high.

  The action / effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are tables used when changing from special hold to normal hold, and are patterns for lowering the display mode of the hold display to one with a low degree of expectation. It is said that the table is for selecting a table, and in particular, since the selection ratio of action effect A is high, action effect A is an action effect of a pattern that lowers the display mode of the suspension display to a low expectation degree. It can be said (pattern 1). Further, the action and effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45C and 45D are tables used when the special hold does not change and are tables for selecting a pattern for maintaining the display mode of the hold display. In particular, since the selection ratio of the action effect B is high, it can be said that the action effect B is an action effect of a pattern maintaining the display mode of the hold display as it is (pattern 2). Further, the action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 46E to 46H are tables used when changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold, and the display mode of the hold display has high expectation. It can be said that it is a table for selecting a pattern to be built up, and in particular, since the selection ratio of the effect stage C is high, the effect stage C has a pattern of displaying the display mode of the suspension display to a high expectation. (Pattern 3).

  And since the above-mentioned pattern 1 and pattern 2 are what make the display mode of a reservation display lower or maintain the present condition, they are patterns for showing a change failure as an operation effect, and the above-mentioned pattern 3 is a display of a reservation display As it is what makes up an aspect, it is a pattern to make it appear to be a successful change as an effect representation. In addition, even if it is a pattern for showing the same change failure, it may be different in how to show the effect presentation between the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 described above. For example, when executing action effects according to pattern 1 above, characters such as "big failure" are displayed, and when operation effects according to pattern 2 above are executed, characters such as "fail" The display may be made different.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the case where the presence or absence of the effect presentation and the determination ratio of the type are different depending on which display mode the pending display changes in the current variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, regardless of the change mode of the current variable display, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the effect and the type may be changed according to which final display mode the pending display changes.

  Also, for example, depending on the display result (for example, whether or not to be a big hit) of the variable display of the advance notice object or the change category (for example, the presence or the type of reach) You may configure it.

  Further, for example, in the case where the display mode of the hold display may be changed from blue hold to red hold, it is possible to execute the action effect even when the blue change is not changed in the current variable display. You may

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold display may be changed from blue hold to red hold as described above, even if the same variable hold changes from the same special hold to the blue hold in this variation display. Depending on whether the final display mode is blue hold or red hold, the execution ratio and type of the effect may be different. For example, the effect presentation may be performed at a higher rate when the final display mode is red hold, or the effect presentation (for example, the effect presentation C) having a high degree of expectation may be performed. Alternatively, conversely, the effect presentation may be performed at a higher rate when the final display mode is blue hold, or the operation presentation (for example, the effect presentation C) having a high degree of expectation may be performed. . With such a configuration, it is possible not only to give a sense of expectation whether the display mode of the hold display changes in the variable display executed this time, but also whether the display mode of the hold display may change thereafter. It can give a sense of expectation.

  If it is determined to execute the action presentation (Y in step S8009), the CPU 101 for production control selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the action presentation determined in step S8008 (step S8010). . Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

  On the other hand, if the probability change status flag or the time saving status flag is set (Y in step S8002), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S8003), the first pending storage is performed. If there is no timing at which the effect presentation can be performed (N in step S8006), or if it is decided not to execute the action presentation (N in step S8009), the CPU 101 for effect control changes A normal process table (a process table without an effect presentation) corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S8011). Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8010 and S8011 (step S8012).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, it may be possible to execute notice effects (so-called notice effects for the change) other than the advance notice effect (in this example, the hold notice effect in this example) during the change display of the effect design, in which case the notice at the start of the change When it is determined to execute the effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the determined advance effect in steps S8010 and S8011.

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8013). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8014).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start winning winning command stored in the start winning winning command storage area (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number increment designating command (first pending storage number increment) Deletes one command at the time of starting winning combination stored in the first storage area among the designated command or the second reserved memory number addition specifying command), and shifts the contents of the starting winning time command storage area ( Step S8015).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8016).

  FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the action effect is being executed and the end timing of the effect effect is reached (step S8106). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8014 whether or not it is the end timing of the effect presentation. If it is the end timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 causes the pending display of the notice object to be blue pending or based on the change pattern stored in the pending advance attraction setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether it is the timing to change to red hold (step S8107). If it is the change timing to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice object to blue hold or red hold. The operation is performed (step S8108).

  If it is not time to change to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold target of the advance notice based on the change pattern stored in the hold advance effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether or not it is the change timing to the normal hold (step S8109). If it is the change timing to the normal hold, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to change the display mode of the hold display of the advance notice object to the normal hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a (step S8110).

  Next, even if the effect control CPU 101 does not come to the end timing of the action effect, it is stored in the other pending storage based on the change pattern stored in the on-hold notice rendering setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether there is a timing for changing to blue holding or red holding (step S8111). Then, if there is a timing to change to blue hold or red hold (Y in step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 causes the first hold storage display unit 9a to display the display mode of the hold display of the notice object. Is controlled to blue hold or red hold (step S8112). That is, in this embodiment, it may be determined that the effect presentation is not performed even if it is a variable display at which it is time to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). Even if the effect presentation is not performed, control is performed to change the hold display at the timing of changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold to blue hold or red hold.

  Next, even if the effect control CPU 101 does not come to the end timing of the action effect, it is stored in the other pending storage based on the change pattern stored in the on-hold notice rendering setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is checked whether there is a timing at which change to the normal hold is made (step S8113). Then, if there is a change timing to the normal hold (Y in step S8113), the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the display mode of the hold display of the advance notice object in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Control to change to (step S8114). That is, in this embodiment, even if it is a variable display at which change timing from special hold to normal hold may be determined not to execute the effect presentation (see steps S8008 and S8009) Even when the effect is not executed, control is performed to change the hold display at the change timing from special hold to normal hold to normal hold.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the processing to display the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (discard symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311. Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU for effect control 101 responds to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) for the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated (step S8311).

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect will be described. FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect. Among these, FIG. 50 shows an effect aspect of the on-hold notice effect when the on-hold display of the notice object finally changes to red on-hold. Further, FIG. 51 shows an effect mode of the on-hold notice effect when the on-hold display of the notice object finally returns to the on-hold. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, an effect aspect of the on-hold notice effect in the case where the on-hold display of the advance notice object finally changes to red on-hold will be described. As shown in FIG. 50 (1), it is assumed that a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 has newly occurred while the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed on the effect display 9. In this example, it is assumed that the first winning storage number has newly increased to 4 and the first pending storage number has been increased to 4 in the state where the first pending storage number is 3, and the normal pending storage display unit 9a is increased by 1 normally. It shall be done. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be red hold, and the change pattern 410 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed one by one, and as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display based on the change pattern 410 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 50 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 410, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), a case is shown in which character B appears as the action effect B, and the effect is executed such that the character B throws the ball toward the special hold. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed on the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 50 (6), even when the effect presentation B ends, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change with the special pending based on the change pattern 410. Then, based on the end of the variation display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (7), the variation display of the effect design is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed one by one, and as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the effect presentation based on the change pattern 410, and it is decided to execute the effect presentation. It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect C (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the action effect C is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), a case is shown in which the character C appears as the action effect C, and the effect is executed such that the character C throws the ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), there is shown a case where the variation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 50 (9), when the end timing of the action effect C comes, the hold display of the advance notice object changes from special hold to red hold based on the change pattern 410 (steps S8107 and S8108). reference).

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, a case is shown where a special display of triangle display is displayed as a special display, but if it is determined to be a change pattern for displaying a special display of rectangular display, FIG. 3) The special display of the rectangular display is displayed in (8). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where red hold is displayed as the final display mode is shown, but in the case where it is determined to be the change pattern for displaying blue hold as the final display mode, FIG. Change from special hold to blue hold in 9).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, an effect aspect of the on-hold notice effect in the case where the on-hold display of the advance notice object is finally returned to the on-hold will be described. As shown in FIG. 51 (1), it is assumed that a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 has newly occurred while the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed in the effect display 9. In this example, it is assumed that the first winning storage number has newly increased to 4 and the first pending storage number has been increased to 4 in the state where the first pending storage number is 3, and the normal pending storage display unit 9a is increased by 1 normally. It shall be done. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold), and the change pattern 402 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (3), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the next variable display is started on the effect display 9. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), a case is shown in which character B appears as action effect B, and the effect is executed such that character B throws a ball toward special holding. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed on the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect production. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), even when the effect presentation B ends, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change with the special pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the effect presentation A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), a case is shown in which character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is executed such that the character A throws a ball toward special holding. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), there is shown a case where the fluctuation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 51 (9), the hold display of the advance notice object changes from special hold to normal hold based on the change pattern 402 when the end timing of the action effect A comes (steps S8109 and S8110). reference).

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, a case is shown where the special display of triangle display is displayed as the special display, but if it is determined to be the change pattern for displaying the special display of rectangular display, FIG. 3) The special display of the rectangular display is displayed in (8).

  In the on-hold notice effect shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the manner in which the action effect is shown may differ depending on which display mode the on-hold display changes (or does not change). For example, if the hold display does not change with the special hold, it will display characters such as "failure" or if the hold display drops from special hold to normal hold, it will display characters such as "big failure", When the hold display is changed from special hold to blue hold or red hold, characters such as “success” may be displayed.

  Also, for example, in the case where the display mode of the hold display may change from blue hold to red hold, if the hold display changes from blue hold to red hold, a character display such as “success” is displayed. If the hold display changes from special hold to red hold at once, characters such as "very successful" may be displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display the specific display (in the present example, the hold display) corresponding to the variable display, and the specific display by the first aspect (in the present example, the special hold). After displaying the change display effect of changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the hold notification effect with the action effect) can be executed. In addition, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold in the present embodiment) can be performed. When the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is the third mode (generally, in this example, It is possible to execute an effect of changing to "hold". The specific display displayed in the third mode has a lower rate of change to the second mode than the specific display displayed in the first mode (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, special hold) The change pattern that changes from red to normal hold and then changes to red hold also has only the change patterns 411 and 414 that can be selected only when the first hold memory number is 4 and the super reach jackpot at the start winning combination, There are very few allocations, and the change patterns 31, 32, and 401 to 404, which do not change from normal hold, allocate more judgment values, and after changing from special hold to normal hold, there is no chance to change to red hold. May be). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower degree of advantage than the specific display displayed by the first aspect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 39, special hold) If the status changes from normal to normal (in the case of normal hold (with special hold)), the percentage of super reach jackpots or super reach loss is lower than in the case of blue hold or red hold, and non-reach miss A high percentage of Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Specifically, the first aspect (in the present example, the special hold) is continuously displayed even if the action presentation of the failure mode is executed in the hold notification effect, the first aspect (in the present example) There is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the special hold may decrease, but in this embodiment, the first aspect (in this example, the special hold) changes to the third aspect (in the present example, the normal hold). Expectations for the aspect can be enhanced, and a reduction in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering can be prevented.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is shown as the “specific display displayed by the third mode”, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to include what is displayed as normal hold from the beginning without going through special hold as the “specific display displayed according to the third aspect”, and even with such normal hold, special hold and It may be configured to have a low rate of change to blue hold or red hold, or may be configured to have a low degree of advantage.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the normal hold is the same, if the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the degree of expectation is lower and the advantage is lower than when the normal hold is displayed from the beginning. It's getting lower.

  In this embodiment, although the case where big hit expectation degree and reach (super reach) expectation degree differ as "the advantage degree" was shown, it is constituted so that probability change expectation degrees may differ not only in such a mode. It is also good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode (in this example, special hold, and may be normal hold) and the second mode (in this example) having a high degree of advantage. , Blue hold, red hold). As the change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode, and according to the execution mode of the executed change effect, the change effect It is possible to execute the change presentation according to different proportions after (in this example, even if the action presentation is performed in the hold announcement presentation, if the change remains the special hold, the action presentation is executed again and the special hold is performed) It is possible to change from blue hold to red hold, but when the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, the action effect is not executed thereafter). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the case where the effect presentation is executed in the suspension announcement effect and the special suspension changes to a blue suspension or a red suspension, a case is shown in which the operation presentation is not executed thereafter. However, the effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. As such, in the case of "performing change by different proportions after the change effect depending on the execution mode of the change effect that has been executed", the action after that is changed from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold. The one with a low execution ratio of production is also included.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific indication is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode, and the executed change effect It is possible to execute the change presentation by the different presentation mode after the change presentation according to the execution mode of (in this example, even if the action presentation is executed in the hold announcement presentation, it does not change with the special hold) After that, the effect production is executed again, and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but when the action effect is executed in the hold preview effect to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, If the effect presentation is performed in the holding advance presentation effect and the special suspension does not change, then the operation presentation is executed again and the blue suspension from the special suspension is performed. There is the case that change to red hold and if changes, many variations of the representation embodiment.). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, after the specific indication is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific indication to the second mode can be executed, and the executed change effect is Depending on the execution mode, the rate at which the change effect is to be performed for the specific display after the change effect is different (in the present example, when a plurality of special reservations are displayed, the action is performed in the on-hold notice effect) If the effect is executed and the first special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, then the effect is executed only for the second or later special hold, and the hold display changes. Although there is no change in the first special hold, the effect presentation is executed for the first special hold and the hold indication can be changed). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed, and a plurality of types of changes can be made. It is possible to execute the effect (in this example, the effect effects A to C can be executed in the hold notification effect), and depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, any type of change effect after the change effect The ratio of whether to execute is different (in this example, when the effect presentation B is executed, the ratio that does not change with the special hold is high, and when the effect hold with the special hold is not performed. Because there are many cases that change to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold, the ratio of action effect A and action effect C becomes high). Therefore, attention can be paid to the change presentation that is executed first, and the interest when the change presentation is performed can be improved.

  In the case where the effect presentation can be executed even after the special suspension changes to the normal suspension, “any type of change presentation is executed after the change presentation according to the execution mode of the executed change presentation The “proportions of performing” may be different from each other, for example, it may include one in which an action effect (action effect of a gusset) in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is easy to be performed in the action effect performed later.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (in this example, the special hold) as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is the second mode having a high degree of advantage (the present example) In the case where it is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) and display the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normal hold). Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode at a different ratio according to the execution mode of the change effect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 45A, the action effect A is executed in the hold notification effect) When the rate of special hold changes to normal hold). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of the first mode (in this example, special hold for triangle display and special hold for rectangular display), and as a change effect, the first mode (special hold in this example) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold in this case) after displaying the specific display by the first display. If the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the mode, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normal hold) can be performed It is. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode by a different ratio according to which type of the first mode is used to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 39C in this example) When the special display of triangle display is displayed, the ratio of changing from special storage to normal display is higher than when the special display of rectangular display is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where there are two types of special reservations (triangular display and rectangular display) having different shapes as a plurality of first aspects, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, for example, display color There may be a plurality of different types of hold indication (for example, blue and green hold indication) different from each other. Further, for example, the present invention may be configured to have three or more types of first aspects (normal suspension and special suspension), not limited to two types of first embodiments (normal suspension and special suspension).

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (in this example, the special hold) as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is the second mode having a high degree of advantage (the present example) In the case where it is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) and display the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (in this example, normal hold). And in the predetermined period, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low (in this example, in the period when the hold display of the notice object is displayed at the fourth and third positions, It is difficult for the notice display of the notice target to change from special hold to normal hold, and the hold display of the notice target may never change from special hold to normal hold. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the first mode, the specific display is displayed in a special mode (in this example, special hold) different from the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  It should be noted that in this embodiment, in the case of red hold, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high, and in the case of blue hold, the expectation for the big hit (reliability) is high. The expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be the same in the special hold and the special hold, and the special hold may be configured to have a higher expectation (reliability) for the big hit than the normal hold.

  In this embodiment, the special suspension is displayed as the first aspect, and the normal suspension is displayed as the third mode, and the special suspension is changed to the normal suspension, but it is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a normal hold is displayed in the position of the first mode, and as the third mode, it is indicated that the display mode of the hold display has been changed (eg, a round display including a character display of "ready") May be configured to be displayed. Hereinafter, the modification 1 configured to be able to display the completed hold will be described.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is the process shown in FIGS. 37 to 41, 43, 45 to 46, and 48. In the processing and each decision table, it is equivalent to reading a special hold into a normal hold, and replacing a normal hold with a changed special hold into a completed hold.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 52, too, there are very few allocations for change patterns that change to red hold after changing from special hold to read change pattern 411, 414 shown in FIG. The rate of change to hold is lower than the rate of change from normal hold to red hold, and closed hold has a lower advantage than normal hold.

  In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), when the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed in the effect display device 9, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 newly occurs. It shall be done. In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the first winning storage number is newly increased to 4 and the first pending storage number is increased to 4 in the state where the first pending storage number is 3, and the first pending storage display portion 9a is normally suspended. It shall be increased by one. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new pending display is determined to be the pending status, and the change pattern 402 (however, the change pattern read as the pending status etc.) is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 52 (3). However, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (3), when the variable display is started, the pending display of the advance notice object does not usually change with the pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display 9, as shown in FIG. 52 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the character B appears as the action effect B and the effect is executed such that the character B throws the ball toward the hold display (normal hold) of the advance notice object. Is shown. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed on the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect production. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), even when the end effect of the action effect B comes, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change as usual, based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed one by one, and as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the effect presentation A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is executed such that the character A throws the ball toward the hold display (normal hold) of the advance notice object. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), there is shown a case where the fluctuation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A comes, the pending display of the advance notice object changes from normal pending to completed pending based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109 and S8110). reference).

According to the first modification shown in FIG. 52, the specific display is displayed in the normal mode (normal suspension) as the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering.

  In this embodiment, the expression “normal mode (normal hold)” is used, but the normal mode (normal hold) means, for example, a display mode of a hold display that is displayed when the hold notification effect is executed. The display mode that is most frequently displayed among the above is a display mode that suggests no possibility of jackpot or reach or is relatively low.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case of performing the on-hold notice effect so that only the on-hold indication can be changed is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the currently executing variable display by the display mode that has taken over the display mode of the hold display, the hold display is digested and the variable display of the advance object is being executed. Even in the case where it becomes, the display mode of the active display may be configured to be changeable. That is, not only when the pending display is configured to be changeable as the specific display, but also the active display may be configured to be changeable as the specific display. A second modification in which the display mode of the active display is also changeable will be described below.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect mode of the on-hold notice effect in the second modification. In the second modification, the processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is performed in each of FIGS. 37 to 41, 43, 45 to 46, and 48. In the processing and decision tables, add the processing to display the active display, and also configure the display similar to the normal hold, special hold, blue hold, red hold, etc. in the active display to change the display mode of the active display The change pattern may be configured as much as possible.

  In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 53 (1), when the variable display of the left middle right design symbol is being executed in the effect display device 9, a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 newly occurs. It shall be done. In this example, it is assumed that the first winning storage number has newly increased to 3 and the first pending storage number has increased to 3 in the state where the first pending storage number is 2, and the normal pending storage display unit 9a is increased by one for normal retention. It shall be done. Further, it is assumed that an active display unit 9F is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and an active display corresponding to the currently displayed variable display is displayed on the active display unit 9F. Also, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold), and the change pattern 402 (but with the active display also changed to be changeable) as the change pattern. It shall be decided. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Then, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the advance notice object is changed from the normal hold to the special hold of the triangle display based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested and one pending display is shifted and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the next variable display is started on the effect display 9. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the effect presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the effect presentation. It is assumed that the type is determined to be action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), a case is shown in which character B appears as the action effect B, and the effect is executed such that the character B throws the ball toward the special hold. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), the case where the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is shrunkly displayed by the edge part of the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9 is shown during execution of an effect. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 53 (6), even if the end timing of the action effect B comes, the pending display of the advance notice object does not change with the special pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the fluctuation display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is ended in the effect display device 9.

  Next, one pending storage is digested, and the next variation display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (8). Further, based on the start of the change display of the advance notice object, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold corresponding to the change display of the notice object currently being executed. It is displayed on the active display unit 9F. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), when the variable display is started, it is judged that it is the executable timing of the action presentation based on the change pattern 402, and it is decided to execute the action presentation It is assumed that the type of effect is determined to be the effect effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), a character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is executed such that the character A throws the ball toward the active display of the same display mode as the special hold The case is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), there is shown a case where the fluctuation display of the effect design is reduced and displayed at the end of the display screen of the effect display 9 while the effect is being executed. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), when the end timing of the action effect A comes, the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold based on the change pattern 402 is the display mode similar to the normal hold. The display changes to the active display (see steps S8109 and S8110).

  When the blue or blue display is determined as the final display mode, the active display may change to the active display of the same display mode as blue hold or red hold in FIG. 53 (9).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the action and effect performed by the aspect acting on the specific display displayed in the first aspect (in this example, FIG. 50 (5), FIG. 50 (8), FIG. 51), it is possible to execute a change effect including the operation effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 51 (8). In addition, it is possible to execute the action effect a plurality of times for the specific display displayed by the first aspect of 1 (in this example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. After the special hold is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift, the effect hold is executed but the special hold does not change, and the effect hold is performed at the third hold shift timing and the special hold is performed. Can change from normal to on hold). Therefore, the rendering effect in the case of executing the change rendering can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case is shown where the change pattern capable of performing the action effect at most twice is provided, but the change pattern capable of executing the action effect three times or more is provided. It is also good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the first mode is the second mode. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change patterns 411 and 414) in which the red hold is finally displayed even if the normal hold returns from the special hold as shown in FIG. Change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot). Therefore, the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed by the third aspect can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, assuming that "the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode", the case in which the hold display changed from special hold to normal hold is further changed to red hold Although shown, it may be configured to have a high degree of advantage also when, for example, the hold display displayed from the beginning on normal hold changes to red hold, not limited to such content.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the final display mode and change pattern of the suspension display are determined at the start winning combination, and thereafter, the presence or absence and the type of the effect presentation are determined for each variable display. Not limited. For example, without using a change pattern, it is configured to determine the presence or absence and type of effect presentation each time the variable display, and to determine whether to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. May be

Second Embodiment
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the other hold display changes from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is digested. It may be configured to limit things. The second embodiment for restricting the change from special hold to normal hold will be described below.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing pending notification effect setting processing (step S800A) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in addition to the processing shown in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S6009 and S6010 is executed in the suspension announcement rendering setting processing. In step S6009, the effect control CPU 101 determines which of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, and 414 (change pattern including a change from special hold to normal hold) the change pattern of the hold display determined in step S6007X. Whether or not it is confirmed (step S6009). If one of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, and 414, the effect control CPU 101 sets a restriction flag indicating restriction of changing from special hold to normal hold (step S6010).

  In addition, when the limit display set in step S6010 changes from special hold to normal hold when the hold display is digested, it starts when the variation display corresponding to the hold display starts or ends. It is reset in processing and the effect design fluctuation stop processing.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S6005X, the final display mode of the suspension display is determined using the final display mode determination table different from the process of step S6005 shown in the first embodiment (step S6005X) .

  55 and 56 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table in the second embodiment. However, when the first number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the pending display using the same final display mode decision table as in FIGS. 38 (A) to (C). Do.

  In this embodiment, if the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 101 If the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the hold 3 shown in FIG. 55 (D-1) if the restriction flag is not set. If the final display mode determination table for ~ 4 and the non-reach out and limit flag off is selected and the limit flag is set, the 3 to 4 reservations shown in FIG. 55 (D-2) and the non-reach out And the final display mode decision table for the limit flag ON is selected. Also, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates a super reach loss (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), and if the restriction flag is not set, it is shown in FIG. 55 (E-1). If the final display mode determination table for 3 to 4 pending and the super reach is out and the limit flag off is selected, and the limit flag is set, 3 to 4 pending and the super shown in FIG. 55 (E-2) The final display mode determination table for reach out and limit flag on is selected. Further, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates the super reach big hit (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), if the restriction flag is not set, FIG. 56 (F-1). If the final display mode determination table for the 3 to 4 and the super reach big hit and the restriction flag off is selected and the restriction flag is set, the 3 to 4 reservations shown in FIG. 56 (F-2) And select a final display mode determination table for super reach jackpot and limit flag on. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the process of step S6007X, the change pattern of the suspension display is determined using the change pattern determination table different from the process of step S6007 shown in the first embodiment (step S6007X) .

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the change pattern determination table in the second embodiment. However, for the change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to 41 (H), the effect control CPU 101 changes those patterns shown in the first embodiment. A change pattern of the pending display is determined using a table similar to the determination table.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured such that the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “4”, and the variation indicated by the variation category command If the category indicates a super reach jackpot (the change categories 23, 26 shown in FIG. 17) and red hold is determined as the final display mode, hold 4 if the restriction flag is not set. If you select the change pattern determination table for individual and super reach big hit and red hold and limit flag off, and the limit flag is set, change pattern determination for 4 pending and super reach big hit and red hold and limit flag on Select a table

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (that is, when the hold indication changed from the special hold to the normal hold is displayed), the normal hold ( It is configured not to decide via special hold). Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set, change patterns 411 and 414 including a change from special hold to normal hold are not determined. . With such a configuration, in this embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the other hold indication changes from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold indication changed to the normal hold is digested. There is no limit.

  In this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (when the hold display changed from special hold to normal hold is displayed), the other hold display may change from special hold to normal hold. Although the case is shown in which there is no restriction, it is also possible to limit by limiting the rate at which other hold indication changes from special hold to normal hold, not limited to such an aspect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect is limited (in this example, when the restriction flag is set (that is, special hold to normal hold) In the case where the pending display changed to is displayed, the change patterns 411 and 414 including the change from normal hold (with special hold) and special hold to normal hold are not determined). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game when the change effect is executed.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the hold display is changed to a display mode (blue hold or red hold) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, but the hold display can be changed to a display mode indicating the content of the effect You may configure it. Hereinafter, a third embodiment will be described in which the hold display can be changed to the display mode that suggests the contents of the effect.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the first embodiment, the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b are provided. However, in this embodiment, the total number of pending storages is displayed instead of these. It is assumed that a total hold storage display unit is provided. In addition to the mode shown in this embodiment, the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine provided with the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. It is also good.

  Also, in the first embodiment, there is shown the case where the big hit type is usually big hit, positive variation big hit, and sudden positive variation big hit as a big hit type, but in this embodiment, instead of these, 15R true variation big hit, 8R Suppose that a definite big hit and a sudden big hit are provided.

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display displayed in the total hold storage display unit, a normal display mode showing a reliability for becoming a 15R / 8R probability variation big hit, and a production suggestion suggesting the execution of a predetermined production A display mode is provided.

  The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white, "red" displayed in red, and "gold" displayed in gold, and the reliability with respect to the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit Is gold> red> white.

  In the effect suggestion display mode, the first special suggestion mode that indicates that the special zone effect is to be notified by displaying the characters “special”, and the special zone effect by displaying the characters “special?” Displaying a second special suggestion mode that indicates that the subject is an advance notice, and a pseudo link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo ream is to be executed by displaying the letter “NEXT”; and a letter “SP” And SP suggestive mode suggesting development to super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect announcement is targeted, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is an advance objective or not It is a display mode to obtain. Also, the pseudo link suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when performing pseudo link, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when developing into super reach.

  The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a configuration in which the reliability against the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit is higher as the number of times of execution is larger. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect is sometimes referred to as "entering the special zone". Immediately before entering the special zone, a rush success effect is performed. The rush success effect indicates that the entry into the special zone is decided after the entry into the special zone is suggested (for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (4) and (5) described later, “special After displaying “zone chance!”, “Success!” Is displayed. In addition, when the player does not enter the special zone, the player may sometimes execute a rush failure effect which gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player enters the special zone. For example, after suggesting to enter the special zone as in the rush success presentation, an effect indicating that the special zone is not entered (for example, “special zone chance!” Is displayed and then “fail ...” is displayed. The effect can be implemented as a rush failure effect. Hereinafter, the rush success staging and the rush failure staging may be collectively referred to as “a rush notice presentation”. The rush advance presentation effect is an effect that is performed for three seconds from the start of the change. Then, when entering into the special zone, special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation (at the end of the rush success effect). If the fluctuation time of the fluctuation for executing the rush advance presentation effect is shorter than 3 seconds, it is assumed that the rush advance announcement effect is forcibly terminated one second before the fluctuation stop. At that time, when entering into the special zone, the rush success effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the pending display for pending storage for which no change has been performed is performed in the total pending storage display unit, and from the start to the end of the variable display for the pending storage, The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit different from the total hold storage display unit. That is, in the active display unit, the active display (the variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. The active display is an image that shows the confidence that a big hit will occur based on the running variation. As the display mode of the active display, the same display mode as the above-described hold display ("white", "red", "gold" which is the normal display mode, the first special suggestion mode and the second special mode which is the production indication display mode) Suggestion aspect, pseudo link suggestion aspect, SP suggestion aspect) is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of the start winning). Specifically, when the starting winning combination occurs, first, the change mode (the hold change pattern and the change timing to be described later) of the normal display mode is determined, and then it is determined whether to display in the effect suggestion display mode Do. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning combination. Moreover, when it is decided to display in the production indication display mode, the display of the suspension display is started in the presentation display mode from the timing at the start winning combination, and the presentation of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting special zone effects, 5 seconds after re-fluctuation in pseudo ream, 5 seconds after starting super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) When rendering is performed), it usually changes to a suggestion display mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the effect control process (step S 705), the suspension display control process for performing control relating to the suspension display is executed. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process in the third embodiment. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining a hold change pattern of the hold display for the newly generated hold storage (step S3701). Specifically, the pending change pattern is determined using the pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A).

  FIG. 60 (A) is an explanatory view showing the hold change pattern determination table. In each of the pending change pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 60 (A), a decision value corresponding to the pending change pattern is assigned according to the determination result at the time of winning (15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, super reach deviation, etc.) However, in the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the description. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the hold change pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, if the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, P01 at 10% ratio, P02 at 15% ratio, P02 at 20% ratio, P03 at 25% ratio, P04 at 25% ratio, P05 is determined as a pending change pattern at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the result at the time of winning determination is a super reach loss, P01 at 70% ratio, P02 at 15% ratio, P03 at 7% ratio, P03 at 5% ratio, P04 ratio at 3% P05 is determined as the pending change pattern.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other than that, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

  By determining the holding change pattern at such a ratio, the reliability of the display mode of the holding display or the active display for becoming a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit is white <red <gold.

  In addition, the pending change pattern in the present embodiment does not become “red” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “without red”, for example, P01.), And the pending change pattern becomes “red” (below, There are cases in which there are cases where there is red, for example, other than P01). Therefore, selection ratios with red and without red are shown in FIG. 60 (B).

  As shown in the figure, when the winning determination result is a 15R positive variation or a 8R positive variation, the red is selected at a rate of 90% and the red is selected at a percentage of 10%. If the winning determination result is out of the super reach, the red is selected at a rate of 30%, and the red is not selected at a rate of 70%. If the result at the time of winning determination is other, select 100% of no red.

  In this embodiment, when the selection ratio of the special zone effect execution and the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. 60 (B) are compared, when the winning determination result is 15R positive variation big hit or 8R positive variation big hit, If the selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio to execute special zone effects, but the result at the time of winning determination is a super reach loss, the selection ratio with red is lower than the ratio to execute special zone effects It has become. Therefore, in the case where red is selected, the reliability against being a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit is higher than when it is selected to execute the special zone effect. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the display of the pending display or the active display with the display mode of “red” is higher in reliability than the special zone effect.

  In the present embodiment, although it is possible to select P02 to P05 only when the determination result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation big hit, an 8R probability variation big hit or a super reach deviation, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to select P02 to P05 even if the determination result at the time of winning is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a normal reach or a non-reach out.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the pending change pattern determined in step S3701 in the storage area in the start winning command storage area (the storage area according to the total number of pending storages) by changing the pending change. The pattern is stored (step S3702). If the stored change pattern is the change pattern without change (P01 or P03), the process proceeds to step S3710. If the stored change pattern is any change pattern (P02, P04, P05), a change timing determination lottery is performed to determine the change timing (step S3704). Specifically, the change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (A) or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B).

  FIG. 61 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 61 (B) is an explanatory view showing a second change timing determination lottery table. In each of the change timing determination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, a determination value corresponding to the change timing is assigned for each total number of pending storages, but the determination values are shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B. In the example, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where a change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61A will be described. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is a big hit.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 60%, and the active start time is determined as a change timing at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active timing is determined at a 50% rate, the active start time at a 30% rate, and the first at a 20% rate as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "3", active at 40%, active start at 30%, first at 20%, two at 10% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "4", active at 30% rate, active start time at 25% rate, 1 at 20% rate, 2 at 15% rate The third eye at a rate of 10% is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "5", the active start at 22%, the active start time at 20%, the first at 18%, two at 16% The eye is determined as the change timing of the third at a rate of 14% and the fourth at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "6", the active start at 22%, the active start time at 18%, the first at 16%, two at 14% The eye is determined as the change timing of the third at 12%, the fourth at 10%, and the fifth at 8%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "7", active at 20% rate, active start time at 18% rate, 1 at 16% rate, 2 at 14% rate The change timing is determined as the change timing of the third at 12%, the fourth at 10%, the fifth at 6%, and the sixth at 4%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "8", active at 20% rate, active start time at 18% rate, first at 16% rate, two at 14% rate Eyes: 3 in 12%, 4 in 8%, 5 in 6%, 6 in 4%, 7 in 2% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  Next, the case where a change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B) will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table which is used when the determination result at the time of winning is a super reach loss.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 40%, and the active start time is determined as a change timing at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 20%, the active start time at a rate of 30%, and the first one at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "3", active at 10% rate, active start time at 20% rate, 1 at 30% rate, 2 at 40% rate The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "4", active at 10%, active at 15%, first at 20%, two at 25% The third eye at a rate of 30% is determined as the change timing.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "5", the active start at 10%, the active start time at 14%, the first at 16%, two at 18% The eyes are determined as change timings at a rate of 20% for the third and at a rate of 22% for the fourth.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "6", active at a rate of 8%, active start time at a rate of 10%, first at a rate of 12%, two at a rate of 14% The eyes are determined as change timings at a rate of 16% for the third, 18% for the fourth, and 22% for the fifth.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "7", the active start at 4%, the active start time at 6%, the first at 10%, two at 12% The eyes are determined as change timings at the rate of 14%, the third at 16%, the fourth at 18%, the fifth at 18%, and the sixth at 20%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is "8", active at 2% rate, active start time at 4% rate, first at 6% rate, 2 at 8% rate Eyes: 3 in 12%, 4 in 14%, 5 in 16%, 6 in 18%, 7 in 20% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easier to determine, as the change timing, an earlier timing after the start of the on-hold display, in the case of the off state than in the case of the big hit. Therefore, as for the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the reliability against the big hit is higher at a later time after the start of the hold display. On the contrary, the configuration may be such that the reliability against the big hit is higher as early as the start of the hold display, and the change timing may not show the reliability against the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning determination result is neither a big hit nor a super reach (others), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern, and thus the change timing for the other use. Although the determination lottery table is not provided, it is assumed that the change timing determination lottery table for other is provided if it is configured to be able to select the pending change pattern in which the display mode changes even if it is otherwise. It is also good.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start winning game command storage area (step S3705). If the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is the pending change pattern with two changes (ie, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707), If the changed change timing is different from the change timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the change timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). If the change timing determined in step S3707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), a change timing determination lottery until a change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined Step S3707) is repeatedly executed. Thus, two different change timings are determined. A plurality of combination patterns of two change timings may be provided, and two change timings may be determined collectively by selecting one of them.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing (steps S3710 to S3725) related to displaying the on-hold display in the effect indication display mode. In the processing, specifically, a first process (steps S3710 to S3713) related to displaying the suspension display in the first special suggestion mode and a second process related to displaying the suspension display in the second special suggestion mode A process (steps S3714 to S3717), a third process (steps S3718 to S3721) related to displaying the suspension display in the pseudo link suggestion mode, and a fourth process (steps related to displaying the suspension display in the SP suggestion mode) S3722 to S3725).

  Hereinafter, the hold indication in the first special indication mode is "first special indication hold", the hold indication in the second special indication mode is "second special indication hold", and the hold indication in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode is "pseudo continuous suggestion hold" In the SP indication mode, the hold indication may be referred to as "SP suggestion hold".

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the new pending storage is about to enter the special zone to be notified (step S3710). For example, a flag is set when it is determined to enter the special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that a new pending storage is about to enter the special zone to be notified. .

  If the new pending storage is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified, a first special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether to display the first special suggestion pending (step S3711). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special suggestion hold using the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A).

  FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of the display of the first special suggestion hold is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the pending change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (A), in order to simplify the description, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit, if the suspension change pattern is P01, it is possible to execute the display of the first special suggestion suspension at a ratio of 40% at a ratio of 60% It is determined not to perform the display of the first special suggestion hold. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 80% does not execute the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 20% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a super reach loss, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is possible to execute the display of the first special suggestion pending at the rate of 30%, the first special suggestion at the rate of 70% It is decided not to carry out a pending indication. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 60% does not execute the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  If it is determined to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold, the display of the first special suggestion hold is started as a hold display for a new hold storage (step S3713).

  If it is determined in step S3710 that the new hold storage is not scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified, or if the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the new hold is a rush for the notification target. When the advance notice effect is executed (if it is planned to shift to the special zone (if the rush success effect is scheduled to be executed), and if it is not planned to shift to the special zone, it is planned to execute the rush failure effect (Step S3714). For example, when it is decided to enter the special zone, a flag is set, and if the flag is set, it is determined that the new pending storage is to execute the entry success effect of the notice target. It is. Also, for example, when it is decided to execute the rush failure effect, a flag is set, and if the flag is set, it is assumed that the new pending storage is to execute the rush failure effect of the notice target. It is to judge.

  When it is planned to execute the rush advance announcement effect, a second special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold (step S3715). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold using the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B).

  FIG. 62 (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B), a rush success effect is executed as a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of the display of the second special suggestion hold for each winning determination result and hold change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown, although different values are assigned in the case of performing the rush failure effect and in the case of There is. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where the determination result at the time of winning is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit will be described.

  For example, when it is intended to execute the rush success effect (when it is planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the second special suggestion pending display may be executed at a rate of 40%. It is decided not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 80% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 20% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  For example, when it is intended to execute rush failure effect (when it is not planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion pending may be performed at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to carry out the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 20%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  Next, the case where the determination result at the time of winning is out of the super reach will be described.

  For example, when it is intended to execute rush success effect (when it is planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion pending may be performed at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to carry out the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 70%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  For example, when it is intended to execute rush failure effect (when it is not planned to shift to a special zone), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion pending may be performed at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to carry out the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40%. In addition, it is determined that performing the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 30% does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 70% if the change in hold pattern is other than P01. Ru.

  Finally, the case where the winning determination result is other will be described.

  For example, when it is planned to execute rush failure effect (when it is not planned to shift to a special zone), the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 100%, regardless of any hold change pattern. Is determined. In the present embodiment, the special zone is not entered if the determination result at the time of winning is other, so the presence or absence of the display of the second special suggestion hold when executing the entry success effect is The judgment value to decide is not allocated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the hold display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode only when the winning determination result is the 15R probability variation hit, the 8R probability variation hit, or the super reach loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is possible to display the pending display in the second special suggestion mode even when the result of the winning determination is the probability variation big hit, small hit, normal reach out, or non reach out. Good.

  In addition, as described above, when the pending change pattern is other than P01, the second special suggestion pending display is executed at a higher rate in the case of executing the entry success effect than in the case of performing the entry failure effect. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed, the display mode is more likely to change to “red” when entering the special zone than when not entering the special zone. The display mode may not be changed to "red" when the special zone is not entered.

  Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B) is compared with the selection ratio of red reserve shown in FIG. 60 (B). For example, when the winning determination result is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit, while the selection ratio with red is 90% (see FIG. 60B), the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 90 It is less than% (see FIG. 62 (B)). In addition, for example, when the winning determination result is the super reach loss, while the selection ratio with red is 30% (see FIG. 60B), the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 30% or more (See FIG. 62 (B)). Therefore, the reliability for becoming a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit is red retention> second special suggestion retention.

  If it is decided to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold, the display of the second special suggestion hold is started as a hold display for the new hold storage (step S3717).

  If the new hold storage does not execute the advance notice effect of the advance notice in step S3714, or if the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed in step S3716, the CPU 101 for effect control adds a pseudo link to the new hold memory. It is determined whether or not pseudo linked hold (step S3718). If it is a pseudo run hold, a pseudo run suggestion lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the pseudo run suggestion hold (step S3719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the pseudo connected suggestion hold using the pseudo connected suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C).

  FIG. 62 (C) is an explanatory view showing a pseudo connected suggestion execution lottery table. In the pseudo linked suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C), a decision value corresponding to the presence / absence of display of the pseudo linked suggestive hold is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the pending change pattern, but FIG. In the example shown in (C), the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the pseudo continuous suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, if the pending change pattern is P01, performing the display of pseudo linked suggestions at a rate of 20%, displaying the pseudo linked suggestions at a rate of 80% It is decided not to carry out. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that executing the pseudo linked suggestion pending display at a rate of 30% does not execute the pseudo linked suggestion pending display at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a loss, if the pending change pattern is P01, executing the display of pseudo linked suggestions at a rate of 10% displays the linked linked suggestions pending at a rate of 90% It is decided not to carry out. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that performing the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion at a rate of 20% does not execute the display of the pseudo continuous posting at a rate of 80%.

  If it is decided to execute the display of the pseudo connected suggestion hold, the display of the pseudo connected suggestive hold is started as the hold display for the new pending storage (step S3721).

  When the new hold storage is not the pseudo run hold in step S3718, or when the display of the pseudo run suggestion hold is not performed in step S3720, the effect control CPU 101 is the SP reach hold where the new hold storage develops into super reach. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3722). When SP reach hold is made, an SP suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the SP suggestion hold (step S 3723). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the SP suggestion suspension using the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D).

  FIG. 62 (D) is an explanatory view showing an SP suggested execution lottery table. In the SP suggested execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of the display of the SP suggested hold is allocated for each of the winning determination result and the pending change pattern. In the example shown in), the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, if the pending change pattern is P01, executing the SP suggestion pending display at a rate of 30% does not execute the SP suggestion pending display at a rate of 70% Is determined. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that executing the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 40% does not execute the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is a removal, if the pending change pattern is P01, executing the display of the SP suggestion suspension at a rate of 20% does not execute the display of the SP suggestion suspension at a rate of 80% Is determined. In addition, if the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that executing the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 30% does not execute the SP suggested pending display at a rate of 70%.

  When it is determined to execute the hold display in the SP suggestion mode, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

  Here, comparing the simulated association suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62C with the SP suggested execution lottery table shown in FIG. The execution rate of the indication of indication hold and the indication rate of the indication of SP indication hold differ. That is, the effect suggestion display aspect is changed to "red" at different rates based on the type of the effect suggestion display aspect. Thereby, the type of the effect indication display mode can be noticed.

  If the new hold storage is not the SP reach hold in step S3722, or if the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101 performs the display mode according to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702. The display of the hold display for the new hold storage is started (step S3726). Specifically, the hold display is started at "white" if any of P01, P02 and P04, and the hold display is started at "red" if P03 or P05.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in steps S3710 to S3725, the display timing of the suspension display of the effect suggestion mode is set to the start winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the hold indication or the active indication of the presentation mode at any timing such as shifting of the hold indication, during the variable indication, or during the active indication.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is the first special suggestion mode by executing the processing in the order of the first processing, the second processing, the third processing, and the fourth processing. Special Suggestion Mode> Pseudo-Suggestive Suggestion Mode> It is conceivable that it becomes an SP suggestive mode. Therefore, it is possible to collectively determine, for example, which of the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode the pending indication or the active indication is to be displayed. By providing such a table, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of bias in the execution priority (execution frequency). Alternatively, even in the case where it is randomly lottery whether or not to execute the hold display or the active display in each effect suggestion display mode as in the present embodiment, the execution ratio is lower as the lottery is performed earlier. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of bias in the execution priority (execution frequency) by performing (to increase the execution ratio as the lottery is performed later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect indication display mode among a plurality of effect indication display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect indication display modes. For example, when it is determined to execute the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, the hold display including the characters "special" and the characters "SP" is displayed. It is also good. Specifically, it may be possible to display the hold display in a plurality of effect indication display modes by independently executing the first to fourth processes described above. In addition, since the advance notice effects suggested by the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode are both special zone effects, the hold indication is displayed in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. It may be configured not to execute. For example, the hold display of the first special suggestion display mode may be displayed preferentially to the hold display of the second special suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a process (step S802) during effect design variation in the third embodiment. It is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display in the process of rendering symbol variation (step S4701). Specifically, in the above-described active information storage area, active is stored as change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, it is determined that it is the change timing of active display. . As described above, although active is stored as the change timing, if the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, 1 second before the change stops is determined as the change timing of the active display. It shall be. If it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the hold change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to "red", and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to "gold".

  In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode (Y in step S4703), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the rush success effect (step S4704). Specifically, when the rush success effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have passed since the start of the rush success effect is the end timing of the rush success effect. When the rush success effect is started during the fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the fluctuation stop is the end timing of the rush success effect. If it is the end timing of the rush success effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", "Red" for P03, "White" for both change timings before P04, "Red" for one change timing or later but the other change timing If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and if it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change which performed rush success production is less than 8 seconds (period (3 seconds) for executing rush success production and display of pending display or active display after the rush success production is finished) When the variation time is shorter than the total period with the waiting period (5 seconds) before changing the aspect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the fluctuation stop.

  In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (Y in step S4706), it is whether or not it is the end timing of the rush advance notice effect (rush success effect or rush failure effect) Is determined (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush advance notice effect is started in the fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have passed since the start of rush advance effect production is the end timing of the rush advance effect production. If the rush advance notice effect is started during a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the fluctuation stop is the end timing of the rush notice effect. If it is the end timing of the rush advance presentation effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", "Red" for P03, "White" for both change timings before P04, "Red" for one change timing or later but the other change timing If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and if it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change which performed rush advance presentation production is less than 8 seconds (period (3 seconds) for executing rush advance presentation production, and display of pending display or active display after rush announcement production is completed) When the variation time is shorter than the total period with the waiting period (5 seconds) before changing the aspect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the fluctuation stop.

  When the active display is displayed in the pseudo link suggestion mode (Y in step S4709), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo link (step S4710). Specifically, although it is general that in the pseudo ream, the re-variation is started after the chance symbol design is stopped and displayed, but in step S4710, the first re-variation timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo ream . The stop timing of the first chance symbol may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo ream.

  If it is the start timing of the pseudo run, the display mode of the active display displayed in the pseudo run suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4711). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", If it is P03, it is "red". If it is P04, it is after one change timing, but if it is before the other change timing, it is "red". If it is after both change timings, it is "gold". If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and it is changed to "gold" if it is after the change timing.

  It should be noted that a variation pattern is provided in which the variation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the pseudo run, and in the case of changing the display mode of the active display during the variation of the variation pattern, The display mode of the active display may be changed before time (for example, 1 second).

  When the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode (Y in step S4712), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S4713). Specifically, the timing determined in advance for each fluctuation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. If it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the display mode of the active display displayed in the SP suggestion mode is changed to a display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4714). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it will be "white", if it is P02, it will be "white" if it is before change timing, and if it is after change timing, it will be "red", If it is P03, it is "red". If it is P04, it is after one change timing, but if it is before the other change timing, it is "red". If it is after both change timings, it is "gold". If it is P05, it is changed to "red" if it is before the change timing, and it is changed to "gold" if it is after the change timing.

  It should be noted that a fluctuation pattern is provided in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds elapse from the start timing of the super reach effect, and when changing the display mode of the active display during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, It is also possible to change the display mode of the active display a predetermined time ago (for example, one second ago).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts one from the value of the fluctuation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory views showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. First, (1) while the active indication and the two pending indications are displayed, (2) a new pending storage occurs and the pending indication corresponding to the pending storage is the second special suggestion mode (“ Special? ”Is displayed. At this time, it is decided to execute the special zone effect that makes the reserved storage the advance notice target, and that “3” is set as the number of executions K and “3” is set as the remaining number of times R. Further, it is assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and the first and second ones are determined as the change timing.

  Then, the change ends at (3) deviation, and (4) the next change is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, since the remaining number of times R is “2” and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number of times R becomes equal to the number of times of execution K, the rush advance announcement effect is executed. If 3 seconds have passed since then, it is informed that (5) it was a rush success effect, and rushes into the special zone. At the timing 5 seconds after that, (6) the display mode of the suspension display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to "red" (see step S4708).

After that, the change ends at the deviation point of (7), and (8) the next change is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, since the hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in “red” is P 04 and the first change timing includes the change timing, the display mode changes to “gold”.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing variable display, and at least at least the specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the hold display and the active display), An aspect (in this example, "white"), a first specific aspect (in this example, "red") having a higher degree of expectation than the normal aspect, and a second specific aspect (in this example, presentation) Specific display means (in this example, for effect control) that can be displayed in any of the display modes including the first special suggestion mode (the second special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo link suggestion mode, the SP suggestion mode)) A portion of the microcomputer 100 which executes steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711 and S4714) and a specific display of the second specific mode Effect executing means capable of executing effects of the suggested content (in this example, processing similar to steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in the processing similar to steps S8010 and S8011 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) By performing the special zone effect, the pseudo link, and the portion capable of performing the super reach effect), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and When the effect of the content suggested by the specific indication is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific indication is the second specific aspect to the first specific aspect (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, S4708, and S47). When one of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern by executing 1, S 4714, the hold display or the active display displayed in the presentation suggestion display mode which is the second display mode. , Which can be changed to "red" which is the first specific aspect. This can enhance the sense of expectation for the specific aspect.

  When the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, for example, the first specific mode or the second specific mode shown in this embodiment is the first embodiment. To display the specific indication according to the first aspect (special hold), and then change from the first aspect (special hold) to the first specific aspect or the second specific aspect. It is possible to configure.

  Further, it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first to third embodiments described above. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the first to third embodiments described above may be combined as appropriate, or the configurations shown in all the embodiments may be combined. A gaming machine may be configured.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time and the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-series (effect of temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols being executed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation aspect, an example is shown in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the fluctuation is started, but the fluctuation pattern is produced by two or more commands. The control microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, when notified by two commands, before the game control microcomputer 560 reaches reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip rendition as the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and as the second command after reaching a reach (such as reach type or presence / absence of re-lottery effect) (when it does not reach, so-called A command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after the second stop may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. . When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a first command has been transmitted, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next The second command may be transmitted in the timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission may be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the variation pattern command.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, "the proportions are different" means that the proportions are different only in relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the like is also a concept including ones with different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and normal symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result has been shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a plurality of types of medals are inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the control lever by the player. Is applied to a slot machine where a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbol is turned according to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination. It is also possible.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prizes as gaming media, but is a type that encloses gaming media such as gaming balls and gives a score when prize giving conditions are satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the formula type.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming machine is controlled to be in a definite changing state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit as a big hit type or a normal big hit, and the big hit type is determined as a positive variation big hit. However, it is not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configurations shown in the above-described embodiments can also be applied to gaming machines that are controlled to a definite change state after the end.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit, and determines when winning the variation pattern type (prefetching determination), and indicates the result of the winning determination (design designation) Although the command for transmitting the command (the variation category command) is executed and the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes the on-hold notice effect based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination). In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display or an active display). A change in which the display mode of the specific display is changed after the specific display is displayed by the display means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold) A change effect executing means capable of executing effects (for example, pending announcement effects accompanied by action effects) (for example, portions for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, S8106 to S8114 in microcomputer 100 for effect control) The effect executing means, as the change effect, displays the specific display according to the first mode, and then displays the display mode of the specific display in a second mode (for example, a high degree of advantage) It is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns 405 to 45 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I) In the case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display according to the first mode as the change effect, together with the suspension notice effect based on S414 is executable) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the mode to the third mode (for example, normal retention) (for example, based on change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. The specific display displayed by the third mode has a lower rate of changing to the second mode than the specific display displayed by the first mode (for example, FIG. As shown in 0 and FIG. 41, the change pattern that changes from special hold to normal hold and then changes to red hold is selectable only when the first hold memory number is 4 and the super reach jackpot at the start winning combination There are only change patterns 411 and 414, there are very few allocations of judgment values, and change patterns 31, 32, and 401 to 404, which do not change as they are normally reserved, have more judgment values allocated. After that, it may not change to red retention), and further, a launcher capable of launching game media based on the player's operation (for example, a bat operating handle or a bat launching device); While controlling the progress of the game, when the power supply is stopped after receiving the power supply, the game state recovery processing (for example, Sa 904 in the game control main processing) Firing the game medium so as to flow down a first control means (for example, CPU 90103) capable of executing 1 to Sa 9048) and a specific path (for example, right game area 9010R) of the flow-down paths for the game medium to flow down Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a prompt display (for example, right-handed notification image) for promoting the display and a recovery display (for example, power failure recovery screen) regarding the recovery process; Are different means, and are transmitted from the first control means, and the notification means (for example, the right-handed notification LED 9030) capable of promoting notification to promote firing the game medium to flow down the specific route Information on the display means based on the information (for example, the right-handed LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and the game state specification command in the first modification) A second control unit (for example, CPU for effect control 90120) to control is provided, and the second control unit can perform control to display a prompt display together with a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. 92) A part where the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image are displayed on the effect display device 905 by the effect control CPU 90120 executing the right-handed notification processing and the power failure recovery screen display processing includes a gaming machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering. Further, when the gaming state is restored, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and can display a specific display (for example, hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display. The display mode of the specific display is changed after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means (for example, the first hold storage display unit 9a, the second hold storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, special hold) A change effect executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) capable of executing change effects (for example, pending announcement effects accompanied with action effects). The change effect execution means, as the change effect, displays the specific display according to the first mode, and then displays the display mode of the specific display as the second mode (which has a high degree of advantage) For example, it is possible to execute an effect of changing to blue hold or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I) In the case where the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed in the first mode as the change effect, together with the reserve notification effect based on 405 to S 414 is executable) It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the display to the third mode (for example, normal hold) (for example, change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. The specific indication displayed by the third aspect has a lower degree of advantage than the specific indication displayed by the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 39). If the status changes from special hold to normal hold (normal hold (with special hold)), the percentage of super reach jackpots or super reach deviations is lower than in the case of blue hold or red hold. , A high percentage of non-reach), and, further, firing means capable of firing game media based on the player's operation (for example, a bat operating handle or a bat launching device), controlling the progress of the game, and First control means (for example, CPU 90103) capable of executing recovery processing (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in gaming control main processing) when receiving power supply after stopping supply and a flow-down path for gaming media to flow down Promotion indication (eg, for promoting shooting game media to flow down a specific path (eg, right gaming area 9010R) of Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a right-handed notification image) and a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) related to the recovery processing, and a means different from the display means Notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 9030) capable of promoting notification for promoting the game medium to be discharged down the route, and information transmitted from the first control means (for example, in the embodiment) A second control unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for controlling the display on the display unit based on the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command and the gaming state specification command in the first modification; The means can control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 90 and FIG. 92, the effect control CPU 90120 gives a right-handed notification) Management and power interruption recovery screen display processing section for displaying a power interruption recovery screen and right-handed notification image to effect display device 905 by executing) the gaming machine and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect when executing the change rendering. Further, when the gaming state is restored, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  The specific display means for displaying the specific display and the display means for displaying the promotion display and the recovery display may be constituted by the same display device or may be constituted by separate display devices. When the specific display, the prompt display, and the recovery display are performed on the same display device, the specific display means is included in the display means. In addition, with regard to variable display, variable display may be performed on the same display device as the display device performing specific display or the display device performing the prompt display or recovery display, or variable display may be performed on a separate display device. You may

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect in the case of executing the change rendering, and to reduce the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player at the recovery of the gaming state. A game machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, a pachinko game machine 901), and a firing means (for example, a hit ball operation handle) capable of firing the game medium based on the player's operation And the control of the progress of the game, and the game state recovery process (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main process) can be executed when power is supplied after the power supply is stopped. Control means (for example, CPU 90103) and a game medium are made to flow down a specific path (for example, right game area 9010R) among the flow-down paths through which the game medium flows Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a prompt display (for example, right-handed notification image) for promoting emission and a recovery display for recovery processing (for example, power failure recovery screen); Informing means (for example, a right-handed informing LED 9030) capable of promoting informing to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path, which is different from the display means, and the first control means Second control means (for example, effect control) for controlling the display on the display means based on the information (for example, right turn notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and the gaming state specification command in the modification 1) transmitted from CPU 90120), and the second control means can perform control to display the prompting display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 92). , Effect control for CPU90120 the like is right-handed reporting process and the power interruption recovery screen display processing for displaying the power interruption recovery screen and right-handed notification image to effect display device 905 by the execution part) the gaming machine. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiment, in the description of each step of the flowchart, for example, a portion described as “step S1” is abbreviated as “S1”. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device. The front surface of the game board 902 is covered with a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 by a glass door frame 903a provided so as to be openable and closable. The glass door frame 903a can be opened by a player in the game arcade by inserting an open key into the open lock K and releasing the key, and a general player or the like can not open the glass door frame 903a. It is supposed to be.

  A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 66). Each of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of segments or dot matrix, etc., and includes plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") is displayed variably (variation display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols configured with numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display 904B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  The first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type is It may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99". . In addition, although the form which made the 1st special symbol display 904A and the 2nd special symbol display 904B square shape was illustrated in this example, this invention is not limited to this, These 1st special symbols Each segment which comprises indicator 904A and the 2nd special symbol indicator 904B may be arranged irregularly.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided. The effect display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (effect display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B, for example In the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, a effect pattern (also referred to as a decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, is displayed in a variable manner.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, fluctuation of the effect symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the effect display device 905 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the variation display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A, or the variation display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronization with this, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols that become the variable display result are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols etc (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuation display until the finalized design pattern is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started until the finalized design pattern that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0". For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the effect pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Chinese characters are displayed on the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, nine character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to nine types, but may be any number (for example, eight types, ten types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  After the fluctuation display of the production design is started, until the fixed production design that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, each of the production design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the one with the largest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number (for example, "9"). The effect symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (for example, the effect symbol display area 905L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol number, When the effect pattern having the smallest number is displayed, subsequently, the effect pattern having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 905, a first hold storage display area 905D and a second hold storage display area 905U are arranged. In the first holding storage display area 905D and the second holding storage display area 905U, a holding storage display is performed to display the number of holdings of the variable display (the number of special map holding storages) corresponding to each special symbol in an identifiable manner. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol is satisfied, the variation display based on the start condition established earlier is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not satisfied because, for example, 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed. The pending storage display in the first pending storage display area 905D is a pending storage display generated based on the starting winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and in the second pending storage display area 905U The hold storage display is a hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening.

  In this embodiment, a circular white display (a suspension displayed on the first suspension storage display area 905D) of the suspension storage display generated based on the startup winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first startup winning opening Memory display), and a circular white display (Hold on the second hold storage display area 905U) of the hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (enter) the second start winning opening Memory display). In addition, based on the start storage by the game ball passing (enter) the second start winning opening by the holding memory display generated based on the starting winning combination by the gaming ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode of the pending storage display generated may be a different display mode.

  In the upper right of the effect display device 905, the game ball is turned to the right game area 9010R described later by the operation of the bat operating handle by turning on during the small hit game after the big hit game or after the end of the specific big hit game. A right-handed notification LED 9030 is provided to notify the player to launch. The right-handed notification LED 9030 of this embodiment is turned on / off by the effect control CPU 90120 via the LED control board 9014.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, together with the first reserve storage display area 905D and the second reserve storage display area 905U, the special figure reserve memory number is emitted in the upper part of the first special symbol indicator 904A and the second special symbol indicator 904B. A first hold display unit 9025A and a second hold display unit 9025B are provided to display the information so as to be identifiable. The first hold display unit 9025A displays the first special view hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The second hold display unit 9025B displays the second special view hold storage count in a identifiable manner. The first special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the first special view is suspended. The second special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Furthermore, right above the first hold display unit 9025A by turning on (emitting light) in the small hit game during the big hit game or after the end of a specific big hit game, the game ball will be described later by the operation of the bat operating handle right A right-handed display unit 9025D is provided to notify the player to launch the game area 9010R. The right-handed display unit 9025D of this embodiment is turned on / off by the game control microcomputer 90100 (CPU 90103).

  That is, the right-handed display unit 9025D is the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display unit 9025A, the second hold display unit 9025B, the common view hold display unit It is a part of the light emission means which can notify the information regarding a game by light emission like 9025C. Further, the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D in this embodiment are both arranged closer to the right gaming area 9010R than the left gaming area 9010L. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D without moving the viewpoint when the gaming state is the short time state, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. It has become.

  General winning openings 9050A and 9050D are provided on the left and right of the effect display device 905, and general winning openings 9050B and 9050C are provided in the lower area of the general winning opening 9050A. Further, below the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a normally open state (refer to solid line position in FIG. 66) and a tilted position (refer to dotted line position in FIG. 66) in the vertical position by the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary motorized product shown in FIG. And a second electric motor-operated part having a movable wing-piece that changes to the second state.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, the gaming ball passes through the second starting winning hole (enter) It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is on. It will be in the open state where it is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 9022A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  The game balls having passed (entered) the general winning opening 9050A, 9050B, 9050C, and 9050D are the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, and the third general winning opening switch 9026C, as shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, which are detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D, based on the detection.

  A special variable winning ball unit 907 in which a first special variable winning ball device 907A and a second special variable winning ball device 907B are integrated is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. There is.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning winning ball unit 907 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described with reference to vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the special variable winning ball unit 907, the left side constitutes a first special variable winning ball device 907A, and the right side constitutes a second special variable winning ball device 907B. A cover (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 907, and the player can select the special variable winning ball unit through the cover. In 907, it is possible to visually recognize game balls flowing down in the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B.

  The first special variable winning ball device 907A includes a first large winning opening door 90701 driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 67), and is changed to an open state and a closed state by the first large winning hole door 90701. Form the first big winning opening. The first large winning opening is formed to open upward at the left of the special variable winning ball unit 907. The first large winning opening door 90701 can slide in the longitudinal direction between the closed position where the first large winning opening is closed by driving the solenoid 9082 and the opening position where the first large winning opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 907A, when the solenoid 9082 is on, the first large winning opening door 90701 opens the first large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the first large winning opening (enter) Make it easy. On the other hand, when the solenoid 9082 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 90701 closes the first large winning opening so that the game ball can not pass (enter) the first large winning opening. As described above, the first large winning opening changes into an open state advantageous for the player who easily passes (enters) the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition to the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball having passed (entered) the first winning opening is detected by the first counting switch 9023 by passing the first count switch 9023 (see FIG. 67) provided in the first winning opening. . The game ball having passed the first count switch 9023 is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening that has been opened in the first special variable winning winning ball device 907A, the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous second state for the player. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the first large winning opening This is a disadvantageous first state for the player.

  In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first big winning opening are guided to the normally variable winning ball device 906B by an obstacle nail or the like not shown, and if the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the enlarged open state 2 Start winning prize mouth is supposed to win.

  The second special variable winning ball device 907B shown in FIG. 73 is formed so as to protrude upward than the first special variable winning ball device 907A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 9083 (see FIG. 67). A winning opening door 90711 is provided, and the second large winning opening door 90711 forms a second large winning opening that changes between the open state and the closed state. The second big winning opening is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 907B. The second large winning opening door 90711 is between the second state (opening state) in which the second large winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 9083 and the first state (closing state) in which the second large winning opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning ball device 907B, when the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 is in the on state, the second large winning opening door 90711 makes the second large winning opening open state, the gaming ball is the second 2 Make it easy to pass (enter) the big winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 is in the off state, the second large winning opening door 90711 closes the second large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the second large winning opening. (Do not enter) As described above, the second large winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball passing (entering) the second large winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 9024A by passing the second counting switch 9024A installed in the second large winning opening shown in FIG. 73. . A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as award balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 9024A. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened in the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B, other ordinary winnings, such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example More balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, when the second big winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second large winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the second large winning opening This is a disadvantageous first state for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B, a gaming ball flow path 90750 is formed in which gaming balls having passed through the second big winning opening can flow down. The game ball flow path 90750 is a main path 90740 (an area along the solid line in FIG. 73) through which the game ball having passed the second big winning opening can pass and a branch path 90741 branched from the main path 90740 (a dotted line in FIG. 73) Region). A backflow prevention member 90730, which will be described later, is disposed between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741. Further, on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 90730 in the main path 90740, a first branch portion 90742 is provided where the branch path 90741 branches from the main path 90740, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 90730 in the main path 90740 A second branch portion 90743 is provided where the branch path 90741 branches from the main path 90740. That is, the gaming ball flowing down the main path 90740 is movable from the first branch portion 90742 or the second branch portion 90743 to the branch path 90741 side.

  A third count switch 9024B through which gaming balls can pass is installed at the most downstream part of the main path 90740, and the gaming balls pass the third count switch 9024B, and the third count switch 9024B is used. It is detected. The game ball having passed through the third count switch 9024 B is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902. Also, the gaming ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 90741 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the gaming board 902 and passes the fourth count switch 9024C. , And detected by the fourth count switch 9024C.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the small hitting game is controlled to the big hitting gaming state based on the fact that the third counting switch 9024B detects the gaming ball during the small hitting game to be described later. . Therefore, during the small hit game, while the second big winning opening door 90711 is open, the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration etc. and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 9024B. Also, since it becomes possible for the injustice to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment is configured to stop the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 90742 in the main path 90740, a restriction member 90721 is provided which restricts and allows the flow of the gaming ball toward the third count switch 9024B. The regulating member 90721 protrudes into the main path 90740 by driving the solenoid 9085 (see FIG. 67), thereby restricting the flow toward the third count switch 9024B in the main path 90740 of the gaming ball. By retracting from the main path 90740, the game ball is provided slidably in the front-rear direction between the game ball and the allowable state which allows the flow down to the third count switch 9024B in the main path 90740 of the gaming ball.

  The upper portion of the regulating member 90721 is formed to be a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 90740 so as to form a predetermined angle downward toward the branch path 90741 in a front view. . Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the main path 90740 while the regulating member 90721 is in the regulating state, the gaming ball runs along the flat surface formed on the upper portion of the regulating member 90721. It is induced to flow downward toward the branch path 90741 via the route.

  Between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741, the backflow prevention member 90730 is pivotally supported by a pivot directed in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 90730 is a plate-like member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when the gaming ball guided by the flat surface of the regulation member 90721 contacts from the main path 90740 side, it branches off from the main path 90740 side. It can be moved (turned) so as to be able to pass to the 90741 side. Specifically, it is pivotable between a permitted position inclined to open between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741 and a restricted position closed to between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741. It is provided. A 90 rib 801 projecting forward is provided above the restricting member 90721, and the backflow preventing member 90730 abuts against the rib 90801 in a restricting position in a counterclockwise direction in a front view.

  In addition, the backflow prevention member 90730 is usually disposed at the restricted position by its own weight, and in the restricted position, the gaming ball guided by the flat surface abuts from the main path 90740 side (right side in front view) The game ball is pushed by the game ball and pivots clockwise in front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width dimension between the tip of the backflow prevention member 90730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 90743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 9024B Movement of the gaming ball from the 90740 side to the branch path 90741 side where the fourth count switch 9024C is provided is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 90730 is in the restricting position, the backflow prevention member 90730 abuts against the rib 90801 even if the game ball abuts from the branch path 90741 side (left side in front view). The counterclockwise rotation of the member 90730 is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip of the backflow prevention member 90730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 90743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, so the fourth count switch 9024C is provided. The movement of the gaming ball from the branch path 90741 side to the main path 90740 side where the third count switch 9024B is provided is surely restricted.

  Referring back to FIG. 66, a normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 66, the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and multiple types of identification information different from the special symbols The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display).

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a common view reserve display unit 9025C is provided. The common drawing reservation display unit 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the common drawing reservation storage count as the number of valid passing balls which have passed through the passing gate 9041 by light emission. In addition, the passing gate 9041 is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B in the special variable winning ball unit 907. A gate switch 9021 which will be described later is incorporated in the passage gate 9041.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, winning openings other than the above-described winning openings may be provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect LED 909 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the special variable winning ball unit 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  A stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing.

  The upper tray member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. Is provided.

  In this embodiment, the gaming area is divided into a left gaming area 9010L on the left side of a center decoration frame and a right gaming area 9010R on the right side surrounding the effect display device 905 disposed substantially at the center of the gaming area. The game ball shot down weakly with the bat operating handle (left-handed) flows down the left gaming area 9010L, and the game ball struck hard with the ball operating handle (right-handed) flows down the right gaming area 9010R It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the left gaming area 9010L can win the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the general winning openings 9050A to 9050C, and the game ball which has flowed down the right gaming area 9010R is normally A large number of obstacle nails are arranged to be able to win on the variable winning ball device 906B, the first special variable winning ball device 907A, the second special variable winning ball device 907B and the general winning hole 9050D and to be able to pass through the passing gate 9041. It is set up. That is, in the case of left-handed strike, the first special variable winning prize ball device 907A and the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B can not win, and can not pass through the passing gate 9041.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described. In pachinko gaming machine 901, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display 9020 such that the game ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, for example, the fluctuation display of the previous common drawing is finished after the common drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied. The fluctuation display of the common drawing by the device 9020 is started.

  In the fluctuation display of this common figure, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when the predetermined time which becomes the common fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which becomes the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, for example, as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variation display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 67, etc. The variation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is established because the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 67, etc. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the previous special variation display or the end of the big hit gaming state, the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display unit 904B is started.

  In the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, after starting the variation display of the special symbol, when the variation display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the special symbol of The finalized special symbol (variation display result) to be the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special view becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number “2” is a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 904A is different from each symbol in the variation display of the special figure by the second special symbol display 904B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special views.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special view and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 907A The first large winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the first special variable winning prize ball device 907A is put into the second state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first large winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round is ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the first large winning opening etc.) It is also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special figure and becomes the "small hit" as the specific display result, in the small hit gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 907B second (2) The second big winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. It will be in the state. As a result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B is in the second state (opened state) which is advantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, in the small hit gaming state, the second large winning opening door 90711 is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, but the present invention It is not limited and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state.

  In the small hit gaming state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes the third count switch 9024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, the passage of the third count switch 9024B of the game ball It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 90103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 9024B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second large winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch 9024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 90103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 9024C of the gaming ball.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 9024B, the second special winning opening door 90711 of the second special variable winning ball device 907B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). The second big winning opening is opened in the period until the lapse of a) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B is brought into the second state (opened state) advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 907B is controlled to be in the second state when controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 9024B. The invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning prize ball device 907A may be controlled to the second state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the second big winning opening etc.). Good.

  In addition, after the end of the big hit game state in this embodiment, time saving control and time saving control are not performed in the time fluctuation control (time saving control) is performed in a predetermined range of fluctuation number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) It is controlled to either of the normal state. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special drawing fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (e.g., initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, variation display of a special figure is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, that the variation display result is "big hit", in the small hit gaming state It may be ended when any of the conditions for the game ball to pass through the third count switch 9024B is established first.

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, or ordinary time Control to shorten the fluctuation time (common drawing fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display of the common drawing by the symbol display 9020 and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of each common drawing as "per common drawing" Control to improve the probability of becoming higher than that in the normal state, and the tilt control time for performing tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning ball device 906B based on the fluctuation display result becoming "per common place" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than when, and control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state, and there is a high possibility that the second start condition is established. Control is performed that is advantageous for the player in Rukoto. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special view game using the second special view in the second special symbol display 904B is easily established, and the variable view of the special view can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, an LED control board 9014, and a terminal board (information output board) 9016 as shown in FIG. ing. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. In addition, on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901, various substrates such as a payout control board, a launch control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the first special view or the second special view Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, the main board 9011 is provided with a magnetic sensor 9060 for detecting a fraud by a magnet, a radio wave sensor 9070 for detecting a fraud due to an electromagnetic wave, and vibration to a pachinko gaming machine 901 Vibration sensor 9080 for detecting frauds such as changing the course of the door, door opening sensor 9090 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a that covers the front of the game board 902 in an openable / closable manner, opening of the first large winning opening door 90701 The first large winning opening door sensor 9091 for detecting the second large winning opening door sensor 9092 for detecting the opening of the second large winning opening door 90711, provided on the path where the game ball flows down to the lower tray Full sensor 9093 for detecting that the game balls are full on the lower plate, a ball for detecting that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is less than or equal to a predetermined number Re and various sensors such as the sensor 9094 are connected, on the basis of the detection signals output from these sensors, also it has function of determining the occurrence of various abnormal (error). In FIG. 67, the ball breakage sensor 9094 is described as being directly connected to the main substrate 9011. However, in practice, the ball breakage sensor 9094 is connected to the payout substrate, and is connected via the payout substrate. There is.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control An output circuit 9011 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 to 9083 and an information output circuit 90112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal substrate 9016 are mounted.

  The output circuit 90111 is also connected to a controller 9084 for driving the solenoid 9085. The controller 9084 starts drive control of the solenoid 9085 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 via the output circuit 90111 when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated. The controller 9084 drives the solenoid 9085 so that the restricting member 90721 repeats the restricting state and the permitting state every one second regardless of the gaming state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the effect display device 905, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect LED 909 or the like The LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the like is included.

  FIG. 68 (A) is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 68A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the effect display device 905 corresponding to the variable symbol display in the special figure game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a change display result such as a special symbol or an effect pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “off”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) or Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is “off”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the fluctuation stop (decision) of the effect symbol in each of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 905. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designating command for designating a current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command which designates an occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and a type of the generated error (abnormality). In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 78, the occurrence of any error (abnormality) is determined on the side of the effect control board 9012 The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process (see FIG. 91) described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that a first starting condition for executing a special drawing game using a first special figure in a first special symbol display 904A is established. The command ball 200H is that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies based on the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol display 904B being satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying of the first special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the first pending storage display area 905D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying of the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second pending storage display area 905U or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D100H is a V-winner notification designating command for notifying that the third count switch 9024B has been turned on when the player has won the V, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch 9024B.

  The command D200H is a power failure recovery designation command for specifying that the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  The command D301H is a right turn notification LED lighting specification command to specify lighting of the right turn notification LED 9030.

  The command D 302 H is a right-handed notification LED off specification command that specifies that the right-handed notification LED 9030 is turned off.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to be performed, an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105, and a real time clock (RTC) 90106 capable of outputting time information are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103 Data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 69, in this embodiment, on the main substrate 9011 side, in addition to the random number MR1 'for determining the special image display result, the random number MR2' for determining the big hit type and the random number for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data representing each of MR3 ', random number MR4' for determining a common drawing display result, and random value MR5 'for determining an initial value of MR4' is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR 1 ′ to MR 5 ′ may be counted by software update in the CPU 90103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  FIG. 70 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode is "non-reach" and the variation display mode corresponds to "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit". In addition, one fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the like. In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the rendering pattern is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern"), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the rendering pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... You may provide a normal reach variation pattern of In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. . In addition, regarding the special map fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined in advance, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. From this, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, determination is made using only the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, a random value for variation pattern type determination is provided, and these variation pattern type determination First determine the type of fluctuation pattern from the random number value for the variable, and then execute from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type The motion pattern may be determined.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 and uses the RAM 90102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 9011 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the ROM 90101 of the microcomputer 90100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 71 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, the ROM 90101 includes table data that configures a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 9011, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The judgment table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 71 (A), the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 71 (B), and the jackpot type shown in FIG. In addition to the judgment table (for the second special symbol), the small hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 71 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) A table (not shown), a common drawing display result determination table (not shown), a common drawing variation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

  FIG. 71 (A) is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 90101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 ′ is set. In the display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is targeted for fluctuation display and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (A), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, only the big hit can be won and the small hit is not generated.

  Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the subject is subject to variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values correspond to a small hit By being set as a judgment value, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, it will win a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 50% (100/200) .

  That is, when the value of MR1 'matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in FIG. 71A, the CPU 90103 determines that the big hit (big hit A to big hit C) is made for the special symbol. If MR1 'matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 71A, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 71A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control to a small hit gaming state, the stop in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 90103 is adapted to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIG. 71A, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination A table is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the fluctuation special view designation buffer In this way, the determination of the small hit may be made using separate tables for the case where the variation special feature designation buffer is the first and the case where it is the second.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won. However, a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit may be won.

  71 (B) and (C) are explanatory views showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 90101. Among them, FIG. 71 (B) shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) Table. Further, FIG. 71 (C) shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table.

  The big hit type determination table is a big hit type any of the big hit A to big hit C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2 ') when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 (B) and (C), three types of big hit from big hit A to big hit C are provided in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) On the other hand, in the big hit classification determination table (for the second special symbol), only one big hit of big hit C is provided. That is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the big hit that occurs when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed while being one of three types of big hits from the big hit A to the big hit C As a big hit that occurs in, it becomes only big hit C.

  FIG. 71D is an explanatory view showing a small hitting type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. The small hit type judgment table is based on the random number (MR2 ') for the hit type judgment when the variable display result is judged to be a small hit symbol, the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit. It is a table referenced to determine B. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit D is executed If the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, if a V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit E is executed It has become so. That is, these big hit D and big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 'for hit type determination extracted at the start winning, but any small hit game of small hit A and small hit B It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the ball has passed the third count switch 9024B.

  Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (E). In this embodiment, jackpot A and jackpot D in which time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state as jackpot type. A big hit B, a big hit C and a big hit E are set in which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Among the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit A is a big hit repeated five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the first big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, time saving control is not executed.

  The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed twenty times or until a special hit game is executed twenty times, a big hit occurs again.

  The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is executed 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  The big hit D is a big hit repeated four times (so-called four rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of big hit D.

  The big hit E is a big hit repeated 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is played 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  In the time saving state, the probability of "per common" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur because a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It becomes a so-called continuous state which is likely to occur continuously without intervention.

  In addition, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, the ratio that the big hit game state continuously occurs without passing through the normal state (The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit as a result of the variation of the special feature game during the 20 special feature games and the percentage of occurrence of the big hit with the gaming ball winning V) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game end of the big hit C and the big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, the big hit gaming state is continuously without passing through the normal state. The rate of occurrence (the sum of the percentage that a big hit occurs as a result of fluctuating display of the special feature game during 100 special feature games and the percentage that the gaming ball wins V and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100% .

  Although five types of big hit A to big hit E are provided as big hit types in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hit types may be provided. And four or less may be provided.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 ′ are assigned to the jackpot A And 150 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. For this reason, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, time saving control is not executed at the end of the big hit game at a rate of 50%. In addition, when time reduction control is executed after the end of the big hit game, the number of special figure games for which time reduction control is performed is determined to be 20 times at a rate higher than 100 times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), all the ranges (0 to 299) out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment values of MR2 'are big hit Since it is assigned to C, the number of special figure games for which time saving control is always executed is determined to be 100 times after the big hit game is over.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), in the small hitting type judgment table, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 ′ is assigned to the small hitting A, 100 to 299 Are assigned to the small hit B. Therefore, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small hit game, the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is set to 100 times at a rate of 75%. At the rate of 25%, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game.

  The ROM 90101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is a plurality of types described above according to the pre-decision result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, and the variation display result as "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined, and the departure variation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “off” ing.

  In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, each of the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1), the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-2), and the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-3) A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination. In this embodiment, if the determination value is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and if the big hit type is "big hit A". In addition, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be the “big hit B” or the “big hit C”. You can increase your sense of expectation.

  In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is within the range that can be taken by random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1'-1). It is assigned as a judgment value. In addition, although only PC1'-1 is provided as a variation pattern of small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern of 2 or more is provided as a variation pattern of small hits. You may do so.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, it is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the number of pending storages is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. If the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed And the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table D used in advance.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach loss fluctuation fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1'-1), the normal reach displacement fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), and the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) The super reach β is assigned a predetermined random number value as a judgment value within the range which can be taken by the random value MR3 ′ for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2′-3) of deviation. Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1'-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved memories 2 to 4 and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2'-1) For the variation pattern of the super reach α (PA2'-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2'-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination can take Is assigned as the judgment value. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1'-3) corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8 and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2'-1) For the variation pattern of the super reach α (PA2'-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2'-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination can take Is assigned as the judgment value. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PA1′-4), the normal reach fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PA2′-1), and the super reach α For the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) and super reach β, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 'for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) of deviation. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the fluctuation time of the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1'-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern is The fluctuation time is shorter in the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1'-3) than in (PA1'-2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach out of bounds variation pattern is determined so that the variation time is short, so that the pending storage is easily digested and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 In addition to making a start-up winning when not being held, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start-up that is not made pending storage, and when the number of pending storages is reduced, the fluctuation time is not long and the non-reach is not shifted By determining the pattern (PA1′-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the non-execution of the variable display by lengthening the time of the variable display.

  The RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 67 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source created partially or entirely on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (eg, a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 72, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, etc. There is. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 72 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a common view reserve storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  In the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, although the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, it has not been started yet The reserved data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 'for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 90104 etc. by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2' for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, etc. The reserved data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the start winning (second start winning) occurs, it is still started The reserved data of no special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detection of the gaming balls) to the second starting winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 'for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 90104 etc. by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2' for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, etc. The pending data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  The game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball having passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the second start winning port. The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 90151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020, although the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the gaming ball passed the passing gate 9041 Numeric data indicating a random number value MR4 'for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 90154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 90103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 90104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 'to MR4' are stored as random count values, depending on execution of software by the CPU 90103. The numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104 or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104 The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 67 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control content of display operation in the effect display device 905, etc., and the random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variation data write operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various change data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 90120 in the RAM 90122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive input of various signals from outside of the production control board 9012 via the I / O 90125 for the production control CPU 90120, I / O for the production control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  In the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 905, and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the LED control board 9014.

  Also on the side of the effect control board 9012, as in the case of the main board 9011, for example, random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 67, various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation are stored in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  As an example, the ROM 90121 is used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the game effect LED 909, the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.) An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be played, a display screen displayed in notification of various errors (abnormality), an error notification pattern such as a lighting mode of the game effect LED 909, an output sound, etc. are stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are made up of data indicating control contents corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  In the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 67, a data holding area for effect control (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types of states that can be updated according to an effect operation state such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the effect display device 905 or an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit, the start winning prize buffer for performing the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 905D and the second suspension storage display area 905U is set. The start winning buffer is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved storages in the first special view hold storage. In each storage area, data indicating the presence or absence of the start winning combination (specifically, "0" indicating no start winning combination and "1" indicating a starting winning combination) is stored. The data of these start winning combination buffers are effect control to be described later according to the reception of the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. While being updated in the pending display update process (S9072, see FIG. 89) in the process processing, the pending in the first pending storage display area 905D and the second pending storage display area 905U based on the updated data of the start winning buffer Memory display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening, a round white color is displayed on the holding storage display in the first holding storage display area 905D. When the first variation start command is received based on the fact that the first special figure variation is newly started while the display is newly added, the largest of the pending storage displays in the first pending storage display area 905D is selected. The reserve display is performed so that the high-order (first-time start-up reserve storage) round white display is erased and the other round white display shifts (moves) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Update Similarly, when the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the holding storage display in the second holding storage display area 905U. When a second change start command is received based on the fact that the second special drawing is newly added, the top of the pending storage display in second pending storage display area 905U The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the first-time start-up winning storage) is erased and the other round white displays shift (move) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Do.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 74, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 executes the security check process which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not, and then starts the game control main process after Sa901. Do. In the game control main process, the CPU 90103 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 90103 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sa901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (Sa902), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (Sa903). After initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (Sa 904), the RAM 90102 becomes accessible Set (Sa 905). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 90103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 90103 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (Sa906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 90103 executes a normal initialization process (Sa9010 to Sa9012).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area is whether or not the processing of Sd 902 and S d 903 in the power failure detection processing (see FIG. 76) described later is performed. It determines based on (Sa907).

  When backup data is stored, the CPU 90103 performs data check of the backup RAM area (Sa 908). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in Sa 908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 90103 performs gaming state recovery processing (processing of Sa9041 to Sa9048) for returning the gaming control microcomputer 90100 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 90101 is set as a pointer (Sa9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 90102) (Sa9042). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. The processing of Sa9041 and Sa9042 leaves the saved content as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set. Further, the CPU 90103 identifies the gaming state at the time of power interruption from the backup data (Sa 9044), and the identified gaming state is any of the short time state, the small hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state, that is, the game in this embodiment It is determined whether or not it is in the gaming state in which the ball is hit toward the right gaming area 9010R (right-handed) (Sa 9045).

  When the gaming state specified from the backup data is any of the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, and the big hitting gaming state (Sa 9045; Y), the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the right turn notification LED lighting specification command (Sa 9046 ), The lighting of the right-handed display unit 9025D is started. Then, the transmission setting of the power failure recovery designation command is performed (Sa 9048), and the process proceeds to Sa 9015. If the gaming state is the normal state (Sa 9045; N) in which the gaming ball is launched toward the left gaming area 9010 L (a left strike) (N), only the processing of Sa 9048 is executed without executing the processing of Sa 9046 and Sa 9047. Then proceed to Sa9015. Incidentally, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command transmitted and set in Sa 9046 and the power failure recovery designation command transmitted and set in Sa 9048 are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in a command control process described later.

  When the backup data is not stored (Sa 907; N) or when the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa 908; N), the initialization process is executed.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 first performs a RAM clear process (Sa9010). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 90102. Also, the top address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 90101 is set as a pointer (Sa9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (Sa9012).

  For example, by the processing of Sa9011 and Sa9012, initial value for the flag for selectively processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determination per normal symbol, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, etc. Is set.

  After execution of Sa9048 or Sa9012, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 90104 (Sa9015). The CPU 90103 performs, for example, processing in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 90104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 ′ for special image display result determination.

  Then, in Sa 9016, the CPU 90103 performs setting of a register of CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100 so that timer interruption is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 90103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (Sa9018) and the initial value random number updating process (Sa9019). When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, set the interrupt disabled state (Sa9017), and when the display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is finished, set the interrupt enabled state (Sa9020). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to be a reach when not being a big hit, The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, with the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) is determined to generate a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal pattern. Is a random number to The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 90100 controls the game display device such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a power-off detection process (S9010). Then, by executing predetermined switch processing, the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A, and the third switch circuit 90110. Detection signals input from various switches such as count switch 9024B, fourth count switch 9024C, first general winning opening switch 9026A, second general winning opening switch 9026B, third general winning opening switch 9026C, fourth general winning opening switch 9026D The state of is determined (S9011). Subsequently, the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A, the third count switch 9024B, and the fourth count switch 9024C via the switch circuit 90110. In order to pay out the prize balls according to detection signals inputted from various switches such as the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, the third general winning opening switch 9026C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D In step S9012, the winning ball processing is executed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (S9015), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, payout information and the like supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (S9016) .

  Subsequent to the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random value MR1 'and the random values MR1' to MR4 'used on the main substrate 9011 side is executed by software. (S9017). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (S9018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation on the display unit 904B, setting of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening on the special variable winning ball unit 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S9019). The CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 9011 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (S9020). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time By setting the state to the off state or the like, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  The contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described below.

  FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the power failure detection process of this embodiment. In the power-off detection process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (Sd 901). When the power-off signal is not input, the power-off detection process is ended. When the power-off signal is input, the backup data is specified (Sd 902), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage provided in the RAM 90102. It stores in the area (Sd 903). Then, check data used to restore the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (Sd 904). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing in which no processing is performed until the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered off. The power-off signal is continuously output when the power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value, so in the power-off detection process in this embodiment, loop processing is performed after check data is created (after execution of Sd 904). By migrating, new backup data is not stored in the backup data storage area. Therefore, for example, it is prevented that new backup data is not normally stored in the backup data storage area when the power supply voltage is further reduced while storing new backup data.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main side error processing (S9015) of this embodiment. In the main side error processing, the CPU 90103 first determines whether an abnormality informing timer indicating that abnormality notification is being performed in a predetermined period on the effect control board 9012 is in operation (S90401)

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not in operation (S90401; N), the process proceeds to S90402. If the abnormal alarming timer is operating (S90401; Y), the process proceeds to S90420, and the abnormal alarming timer is decremented by one, and whether or not the abnormal alarming timer after the subtraction has risen. It is determined (S90421).

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not up (S90421; N), the process proceeds to S90402. On the other hand, if the abnormality informing timer is up (S90421; Y), after the informing of abnormality is cleared (S90422), the process proceeds to S90402.

  In S90402, an abnormality determination process of determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 78 is performed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment exemplifies a mode for determining an error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 78, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type and number of these errors (abnormality) May be appropriately set according to the model and specification of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, each error (abnormality) of 1 to 15 is set, and in the abnormality determination processing, occurrence of each error (abnormality) of these 1 to 15 can be determined. .

  As shown in FIG. 78, priorities are set to these errors (abnormalities), and in principle, errors (abnormalities) with high priorities are notified with priority.

  These errors include, for example, an error due to a short circuit abnormality of the switch power supply that supplies the power of the apparatus, such as a switch common short circuit error of priority “1”, detection of electromagnetic waves by the radio wave sensor 9070, and magnetic force by the magnetic sensor 9060. Of the device (switch) or an error such as detection error of the first count switch 9023 or the second count switch 9024A, etc. There is no possibility that the game is incorrect such as a full tank error or an out-of-ball error, but there is an error or the like that causes a problem in the progress of the game.

  Also, for each error, a condition for canceling the error that has occurred is set, and for errors with relatively high priority, "power off" is mainly taken as the cancellation condition. For an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority, it is a cancellation condition that a predetermined time elapses or the state of the error is canceled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the error (abnormality) includes an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state and an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state. A relatively high priority error is considered as an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state, and a relatively low priority error (abnormal) is considered as an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state .

  Note that among these errors, even if they are errors caused by the same sensor, some errors may differ depending on the time of detection. For example, as an error when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 9080, abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 9080 at the time of operation of the first special variable winning ball device 907A or the second special variable winning ball device 907B. Is determined to be a high vibration detection 1 error with a priority of "6" and controlled to the game stop state until the power is turned off, whereas the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning When abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 9080 at the time of operation of the ball device 907B, it is determined that the priority is "11" and a low vibration detection 2 error, and after 60 seconds without being controlled to the gaming stop state The error is to be cleared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the output mode of the security signal is set to each error (abnormality), and when the occurrence of each error (abnormality) is determined, each error (abnormality) The security signal is output from the terminal board 9016 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a mode corresponding to the above. The security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) for stopping the game is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority is output. , Or is not output at a predetermined time after the error determination. In addition, with regard to the “incorrect prize error” of priority “10”, the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a predetermined time (4 minutes in this embodiment) after the power is turned on again. Is set as.

  As described above, in the abnormality determination processing of this embodiment, the CPU 90103 is connected to the main substrate 9011, the magnetic sensor 9060, the radio wave sensor 9070, the vibration sensor 9080, the door open sensor 9090, the first winning opening door sensor 9091, the first 2 Large winning opening door sensor 9092, full tank sensor 9093, detection state of the ball out sensor 9094, the state of the payout board, detection state of the game ball of the second start opening switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A Each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 78 is determined on the basis of FIG.

  Then, after the abnormality determination processing of S90402 is performed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination processing (S90403), and the occurrence of the abnormality is not determined (S90403; N) End main side error processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (S90403; Y), it is determined whether an abnormality informing flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed is set, that is, whether an abnormality has already been notified. It is determined whether or not (S90404).

  If the abnormality informing flag is not set (S90404; N), the process proceeds to S90410, sets the abnormality informing flag and the abnormality informing timer, and stores an error (abnormality) to start the informing, The process advances to step S90411.

  For example, if an error (abnormality) to start notification is a vibration detection 2 error, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set in the abnormal notification-in-progress timer, and an error (abnormality) to start notification (starting opening) 2) If the error is an abnormal winning error, a timer value corresponding to 300 seconds is set. However, if the error (abnormality) for starting the notification is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, “0” is set to the abnormality informing timer. As a result, it is determined in S90401 that the abnormal alarming timer is not in operation, so that the set abnormal alarming flag is set until the power is turned off. In other words, for errors corresponding to these "power off" cancellation conditions, the error notification is continued until the power is turned off, so the abnormality informing flag is not cleared until the power is turned off. It is supposed to be. In the case of a prize ball abnormality error where it is determined that the number of prize balls is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the game is not controlled to the game stop state, and therefore an error is notified in a state where the game is possible.

  If the abnormality informing flag is set (S90404; Y), the abnormality in informing is identified from the data of the informing abnormality stored in S90410 (S90405), and the error determined in S90402 (abnormal) It is determined whether or not is the same as the error (abnormality) during notification (S90406).

  If the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is the same as the error (abnormality) in the notification (S90406; Y), the main side error processing ends. On the other hand, if the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is not the same as the error (abnormality) in notification (S90406; N), the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is higher than the error (abnormality) in notification It is determined whether the error is an error (abnormality) of the priority (S90407). If the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) during notification (S90407; N), the main side error processing ends. Therefore, when the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) during notification, the process of S90413 is executed and an error designation command is displayed on the effect control board 9012. Since no notification is sent, the notification of the error (abnormality) is not executed, and the notification of the error (abnormality) in the notification is continued.

  On the other hand, when the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is an error (abnormality) with higher priority than the error (abnormality) during notification (S90407; Y), it further indicates the gaming stop state which is a predetermined state. It is determined whether the game stop flag is set (S90408).

  If the game stop flag is set (S90408; Y), that is, if the game is in a stop state, the main error processing ends. Therefore, when the game is stopped, the process of S90413 or the process of S90414 may be executed even if an error (abnormality) higher in priority than an error (abnormal) during notification is determined in S90402. Since there is no new error designation command sent to the effect control board 9012, the notification of the error (abnormality) during notification is continued, and the output of the security signal changes. There is no chance to turn on / off the signal.

  On the other hand, if the game stop flag is not set (S90408; N), that is, if it is not in the game stop state, the process proceeds to S90409 to reset the abnormality informing timer and reset the error in the informing (abnormal) Update and memorize. If the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) during notification determined in S90402 is an error corresponding to the release condition of "power off", as in the case of S90410 described above, the error is abnormal. By setting “0” to the timer during notification, the abnormality notification flag is set until the power is turned off.

  Then, it is determined whether or not an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) during notification determined in S90402 is an error corresponding to the game stop (S90411), and if it is not an error corresponding to the game stop ( In S90411; N), the process proceeds to S90413 without passing through S90412. If it is an error corresponding to the game suspension (S90411; Y), the launch control board is set to stop the launch, disabling the launch of the game ball from the hit ball launch device, and the game stop flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S90413 (S90412).

  In S90413, an error designating command for designating the occurrence of an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in notification determined in S90402 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 9012 and then the error (abnormality is detected). Setting to output the security signal in the output mode corresponding to (S90414), and the main side error processing is ended. By setting to output the security signal at S90414, the security signal is output from the terminal substrate 9016 to an external device such as a hall computer in the information output process (S9016).

  The error designation command set for transmission in S90413 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process of S9020. Then, in the effect control board 9012, an error notification process (see FIG. 91) to be described later is executed, whereby an error notification corresponding to the error (abnormality) specified by the transmitted error designation command is performed. Ru.

  As described above, in the main substrate 9011 of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned main side error processing is executed, and in the effect control substrate 9012, the error notification processing (see FIG. 91) described later is executed. Thus, as shown in FIG. 79, the execution mode of the error notification differs depending on whether the gaming state is the gaming stop state where the predetermined state is.

  Specifically, for example, when occurrence of a vibration detection 2 error shown in FIG. 78 is first determined in the playable state, occurrence of the vibration detection 2 error is as shown in FIG. 79 (A). In addition, a pop-up window of “E-54 vibration error” corresponding to the vibration detection 2 error is notified by being displayed on the effect display device 905 for 60 seconds which is a predetermined time.

  When the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the vibration detection 2 error, the priority of the prize ball abnormality error is “7”, and the priority of the vibration detection 2 error being executed is Therefore, in place of the pop-up window of “E-54 Vibration error” notifying of the vibration detection 2 error being executed, since it is higher than “11” which is As shown in A), a pop-up window including a message "Please call a staff member! E-33 Prize ball abnormality error Please turn on the power again" is displayed to notify that a prize ball abnormality error has occurred. However, in the occurrence of the prize ball abnormal error, the game is not controlled to the stopped state, and the game available state is maintained.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when occurrence of “Magnetic error” which is an error having higher priority than the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the prize ball abnormality error, While the entire display of the effect display device 905 is displayed in black, it is indicated that the game is being stopped, and the effect display device 905 "Please call a staff member who is in the game stop! E-02 Magnet error Since the display of “Please do it” is displayed in white characters, occurrence of “Magnetic error” is notified, and also, it is notified that an error (abnormality) at which the game is stopped is a magnet error.

  Then, after the game stopped state as described above, the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, which is an error having a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stopped state. In this case, as described above, since the game stop flag is set even if the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, the error designation command corresponding to the determination of the "radio wave error" is not transmitted. As shown in FIG. 79 (B), these "game errors" are continued by the notification of "magnetic error" which is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state being continued without the notification of "radio wave error" being executed. It is not possible to specify what kind of error is the error triggered by the state control, and it is an error triggered by the control of these game suspension states that it is appropriate for fraud using a magnet It is possible to prevent the Do corresponding becomes impossible.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the process of S90414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the "radio wave error" whose occurrence has been determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the "magnet error" being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9018 shown in FIG. 75 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S9021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in S9022 to S9031 in accordance with the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152.

  In the start winning process of S9021, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 9022A or the second starting opening switch 9022B, and if there is a winning, the variable display result determination The random number value MR1 'for the first time, the random number value MR2' for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 'for the variation pattern determination are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A. It is stored at the top of the vacant entry, and in the case of the second start winning, it is stored at the top of the vacant entry in the second special view reservation storage unit 90151B.

  The special symbol normal processing of S9022 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol is displayed based on the presence / absence of pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 90151A or the second special view pending storage unit 90151B. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the display 904B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for the variable display result determination, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is "big hit" is the variable display result Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B (big hit symbol or A small hit symbol, one of an off symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The fluctuation pattern setting processing of S9023 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are selected using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination based on the result of predetermination as to whether or not the variation display result is "big hit". The process etc. which are decided on either are included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of S9022 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing of S9023, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol and the effect symbol as the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the random symbol value MR1 'for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 'for the variation pattern determination. It includes the process of determining the variation display mode of the effect pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation processing, processing for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol indicator 904B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153 is decremented by 1 or added to the first Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B, it is progressed by a common timer A measurement of time is taken. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S9024 is the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol indicator 904A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol indicator 904B. It is sufficient that the process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the symbol is controlled by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S9025 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the finalized special symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on or not, and when the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on or not, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "7". When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation indication result becoming “big hit”, etc., the process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set for opening the first big winning opening Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". It is also good. As an example, regardless of the type of big hit, while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the 1st big winning a prize opening state to “29 seconds”, the opening frequency of the 1st big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit frequency which executes the round, The setting of jackpot status is performed by setting “5 times” for “big hit A”, “10 times” for “big hit B”, and “15 times” for “big hit C”. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S9027 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the first big winning opening, the measured elapsed time, the number of gaming balls detected by the first count switch 9023, etc. The process includes determining whether it is time to return the first big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the first large winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the first large winning opening door 90701 etc. is executed, and then the value of the special view process flag is “6 Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of S9028 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect is performed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the gaming effect LED 909, etc. Processing for waiting until the passage of time has elapsed, and processing for performing various settings (setting of time saving flag) for starting time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  Specifically, in the big hit end process, the type of the big hit that has been executed is specified. Then, if the specified jackpot type is “big hit A”, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0” without setting the time saving flag. When the identified big hit type is "big hit B", the time-shortening flag is set and the initial count value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" is set in the time reduced number counter and the special figure process Update the flag value to "0". If the specified jackpot type is "big hit C", the time-shortening flag is set, and the count initial value ("100" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in the time reduction counter. Update the figure process flag value to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this small hit opening pre-processing, setting to start the execution of the round in the small hit gaming state and open the second big winning opening based on the variable display result becoming “small hit” etc. Processing etc. are included. At this time, based on, for example, the variable display result being "small hit", the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening is opened is set to "one second", and the upper limit number of times to execute the round The setting of the small hit state may be performed by setting the opening number of the second large winning opening to "one time". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "8".

  In this example, in the small hit state, the number of opening times of the second large winning opening is set to “one time”, and the upper limit of the period for opening the second large winning opening is set to “1 second”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of opening times of the second large winning opening in the small hitting state may be two or more times, and the second large winning opening is opened. The upper limit of the period to be in the state may be a period other than “1 second” as long as the game ball can win a prize at the second large winning opening.

  The small hit open processing of S9030 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". This small hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the second big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the second count switch 9024A, etc. And a process of determining whether it is time to return the second big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the second big winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9083 for the second big winning opening door 90711 etc. is executed, and the value of the special processing process flag is "9 Is updated to

  The small hitting end processing of S9031 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hitting end process, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the gaming effect LED 909, etc. It includes processing to wait until the time passes. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9022 of FIG. 80 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 81, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (S90141). The second special view reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display 904B. For example, in the process of S90141, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is other than "0" at S90141 (S90141; N), it is stored as holding data stored corresponding to holding number "1" in second special drawing holding storage unit 90151B. Then, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for special view display result determination, the random number value MR2' for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination are read out respectively (S90142). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S90142, the second special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the second special view pending storage count count value or the total pending storage count count value and updating it. As well as updating the data of the second special view reservation storage unit 90151B. More specifically, random number values MR1 'to MR3 stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B in entries lower than holding number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers "2" to "4"). The pending data indicating 'is shifted upward by one entry (S90143).

  Thereafter, the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer is updated to “2” (S90144), and then the flow shifts to S90149.

  On the other hand, when the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at S90141 (S90141; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (S90145). The first special view reservation storage count is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display 904A. For example, in the process of S90145, the game control counter setting unit 90154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is “0”. Good. As described above, the process of S90145 is executed when it is determined in S90141 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. Determine if As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is not limited to the one to be executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  When it is determined in S90145 that the number of first special view reservations is other than "0" (S90145; N), it is assumed that the first special view suspension storage unit 90151A stores the suspension data corresponding to the suspension number "1". Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for the special view display result determination, the random number value MR2' for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 'for the variation pattern determination are read out (S90146). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of S90146, the first special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count As well as updating the data of the first special image storage section 90151A. More specifically, random number values MR1 'to MR3 stored in entries under the holding number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers "2" to "4") in first special view holding storage unit 90151A. The pending data indicating 'is shifted upward by one entry (S90147).

  Thereafter, the variable special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variable special drawing designation buffer is updated to “1” (S90148), and then the process proceeds to S90149.

  In S90149, a special table display result which is a variation display result of a special symbol is shown in FIG. 71 (A) as a use table for determining which of "big hit", "small hit" and "off". Select and set the display result judgment table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the respective special image display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "off". In comparison with the determination value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is to be "big hit", "small hit", or "off" (S90150).

  After the special view display result is determined in S90150, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (S90151). When it is determined that the "big hit" (S90151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is set to the on state (S90152). At this time, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to the variation special-designated buffer is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (S90153). At this time, when the value of the variation special view designation buffer is “1”, the CPU 90103 selects and sets the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 71 (B), and specifies the variation special figure When the value of the buffer is “2”, the jackpot classification determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 71C may be selected and set. By referring to the jackpot type judgment table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 'for jackpot type judgment stored in the random number buffer for variation is "big hit A", "big hit B" in the big hit type judgment table. In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each of the "big hit C" and "big hit C" matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types of big hit type to be (S90154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S90154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, either time-saving state when time single-out control (time-saving control) is performed, or normal state when time-saving control is not performed Whether to control to the game state is determined before the finalized special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (S90155), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S90156. As an example, if the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, if “big hit B”, “1”, and if “big hit C”, “2” may be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" is not made at S90151 (S90151; N), the CPU 90103 determines whether the special view display result is a "small hit" (S90151a). If it is determined to be "small hit" (S90151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is set to the on state (S90151b). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 71D) is selected and set as a use table for determining the small hit type as any of a plurality of types (S90151 c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “small hit A” in the small hit type determination table, Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each small hit type of “small hit B”, the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S90151 d).

  Corresponding to the small hit type determined in this way, for example, by setting the small hit type buffer value which is the storage value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (S90151 e), it is determined The small hit type is stored, and the process proceeds to S90156. As an example, the small hit type buffer value may be set to “0” if the small hit type is “small hit A”, and may be set to “1” if “small hit B”.

  In S90156, as a result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state (whether the big hit flag is set), as a result of the determination of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, further, to the small hit gaming state In accordance with the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control (whether or not the small hit flag is set), the finalized special symbol is set. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" which becomes an out symbol is set as a finalized special symbol corresponding to a preliminary determination result indicating that the special image display result is "off". In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in S90151, according to the determination result of the big hit type in S90154, it becomes the big hit symbol of "3", "5", "7" Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number of "3" is set as the determined special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is "big hit A". Moreover, according to the determination result which makes a big hit classification "big hit B", the special symbol which shows the number of "5" is set as a confirmation special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit C”. In addition, in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the special figure display result is "small hit", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2" to be a small hit symbol is set as the determined special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in S90156, the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting processing (S90157), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing at S90145 is "0" (S90145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S90158), the special symbol is usually selected. End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (waiting customer demonstration specification command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the effect display device 905 is effect control from the main substrate 9011 It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 9012 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9025 of FIG. 80 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 90103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S9032 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol indicator 904A or the second special symbol indicator 904B. Control for deriving and displaying a symbol is performed (S90181). In addition, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special figure, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 904A is ended, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of "2" indicating the second special figure, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 904B is ended. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 9012 (S90182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S90183), and when the big hit flag is not set (S90183; N), the process proceeds to S90189a.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is set (S90183; Y), the CPU 90103 clears the short time flag if the short time flag is set (S90184), and the big hit stored in the effect control board 9012 Depending on the type, settings are made to transmit a hit start 1 designated command (big hit A), a hit start 2 assigned command (big hit B), and a hit start 3 assigned command (big hit C) (S90185). The hit start designation command set in S90185 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the above-described command control process (S9017).

  Further, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designating command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 9012 (S90186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 905) is set in the big hit display time timer (S90187). Further, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times in the case of big hit A, 10 times in case of big hit B, and 15 times in case of big hit C) is set in the special winning opening open frequency counter (S90188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S9026) (S90189), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, in S90189a, the CPU 90103 determines whether the small hit flag is set (S90189a). If the small hit flag is not set (S90189a; Y), the process proceeds to S90190. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (S90189a; Y), the CPU 90103 hits the start 4 designated command (small hit A) according to the small hit type stored in the effect control board 9012. The setting for transmitting the start 5 designation command (small hit B) is performed (S90189 b). The hit start designation command set in S90189 b is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9017) described above.

  Then, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 905) (S90189 c). In addition, the number of opening (for example, once in the case of a small hit) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S90189 d). Further, the value of the time reduction number counter is decremented by 1 (S90189 e), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction number counter becomes 0 (S90189 f). If the value of the time saving counter is 0 (S90189g; Y), the time saving flag is cleared and the process proceeds to S90189 h (S90189g). If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (S90189g; N) , S90189g is not performed, it progresses to S90189 h.

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "7" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S9026) (S90189 h), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  On the other hand, in S90190, the CPU 90103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S90190; Y), the process proceeds to S90198.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S90190; N), that is, if it is a high base state (time reduction state) in which time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1. (S90191). Then, it is judged whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (S90193). If it is not "0" (S90193; N), the process proceeds to S90198, and the value of the time reduction counter is "0." (S90193; Y), the game state corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag (specifically, the low base state (normally, normal state) after clearing the time short flag to end time saving control (S90193) The transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the state) is performed (S90195). Then, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command (S90196), turns off the right-handed display unit 9025D, and proceeds to S90198 (S90199). Note that the command for turning off the LED for right-handed notification set in S90196 is sent to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020).

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special view process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing in S90198, and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9026 of FIG. 80 as the big hit opening pre-processing. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the right turn notification LED lighting specification command transmitted flag indicating that the transmission setting of the right lighting notification LED lighting specification command has already been executed (S90301) ). When the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has not been set (S90301; N), the right-handed LED lighting specification command transmission setting is performed (S90302), and the right-handed display unit is lighted (S90303). ). Then, the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has been set, and the process proceeds to S90305 (S90304). Note that the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command set for transmission in S90302 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020). When the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has been set (S90301; Y), the process proceeds to S90305 without executing S90302 to S90304.

  In S90305, the CPU 90103 decrements the big hit display time timer by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit display time timer has timed out (S90306). If the big hit display time timer has timed out (S90306; Y), the right-handed LED lighting designation command transmitted flag is cleared (S90307), and the open time timer is set (S90308). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value according to the big hit open processing, and the big hit open pre-processing is ended (S90309). If the big hit display time timer has not timed out (S90306; N), the big hit opening pre-processing is ended without executing S90307 to S90309.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9028 of FIG. 80 as the big hit end process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 90103 determines whether the big hit end display timer is in operation (S90311). When the big hit end display timer is not in operation (S90311; N), the big hit end display timer, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 905 (big hit end display time) It sets (S90312) and ends big hit end processing.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (S90311; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S90313). Then, the CPU 90103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (S90314). If it has not ended, the big hit end processing ends. If the big hit end display time has elapsed (S90314; Y), the CPU 90103 determines whether the stored big hit type is big hit A or big hit D (S90315).

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot D (S90315; Y), the transmission setting of the right-handed LED turn-off designation command is performed (S90316a), the right-handed display part is turned off, and the process proceeds to S90319 (S90316b ). Note that the command for turning off the right-handed LED, which is set to be transmitted in S90316a, is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020). If the big hit type is any of big hit B, big hit C, and big hit E (S90315; N), the CPU 90103 sets the short time flag (S90317) and sets "100" in the short time counter (S90318) ), Go to S90319.

  In S90319, the CPU 90103 clears the big hit flag, and performs transmission setting of a big hit end designation command according to the big hit type (S90320). Then, after performing the transmission setting of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 9012 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the short time flag (S90321), the special figure process flag is processed as a special symbol normal processing The value is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to (S90322). The jackpot end designation command transmitted and set in S90320 and the gaming state designation command transmitted and set in S90321 are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020).

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed in S9029 of FIG. 80 as the small hit start pre-processing. In the small hit start pre-processing, the CPU 90103 first decrements the small hit display time timer by 1 (S90201), and determines whether the small hit display time timer has timed out (S90202). When the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S90202; N), the small hit open pre-processing is ended, while when the small hit display time timer has timed out (S90202; Y), the second big winning game A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, one second) is set in an open time timer for opening the mouth (S90203). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit open processing (S9030) (S90204), and the small hit open pre-processing is ended.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9030 of FIG. 80 as the small hit open process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 90103 first decrements the value of the open time timer by 1 ( S90211). Then, the CPU 90103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (S90212).

  If the open time timer has timed out (S90212; Y), the process proceeds to S90230, and if the open time timer has not timed out (S90212; N), whether or not it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening It is determined (S90213). When it is the opening timing of the second large winning opening, the CPU 90103 controls the second large winning opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 (S90214). Then, transmission setting of the special winning opening open designation command corresponding to the round is performed (S90215), and the process proceeds to S90216. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S90215 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. If it is not the opening timing of the second large winning opening (S90213; N), it proceeds to S90216 without passing through S90214 and S90215.

  In S90216, the CPU 90103 determines whether it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S90216). If it is the closing timing of the second large winning opening (S90216; Y), the CPU 90103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 (S90217) . Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after opening the special winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (S90218), and the process proceeds to S90223. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S90218 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S90216; N), it proceeds to S90223 without passing through S90217 and S90218.

  In S90223, the CPU 90103 determines whether the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90223). When the third count switch 9024B is not turned on (S90223; N), the small hit open processing is ended, and when the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90223; Y), the third count switch 9024B is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 9024B has been turned on, that is, that the gaming ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S90224). If the V prize flag is set (S90224; Y), the small hitting open processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S90224; N), the V prize flag is set (S90225) .

  Then, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 9012 (S90227). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. In addition, if the second large winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 90103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 (S90228), and the opening time is The timer is cleared (S90229).

  Then, in S90230, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "9" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting end process (S9031) (S90230), and ends the small hit open processing.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed in S9031 of FIG. 80 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 90103 determines whether the small hit end display timer is in operation. Is determined (S90231). If the small hit end display timer is not in operation (S90231; N), the small hit flag is cleared (S90232), and transmission setting of the hit end designation command according to the small hit to the effect control board 9012 is performed (S90233) ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (S90234), and the small hit end process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the small hit end display timer is in operation (S90231; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S90235). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small hit end display timer has timed out (S90236). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (S90236; N), the CPU 90103 determines whether the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90237). If the third count switch 9024B is not turned on (S90237; N), the small hit end processing is ended, and if the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90237; Y), the third count is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the switch 9024B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S90238). If the V prize flag is set (S90238; Y), the small hitting end processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S90238; N), the V prize flag is set (S90239).

  Then, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 9012 (S90241), and ends the small hitting end process. The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed in S90236 (S90236; Y), the CPU 90103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S90242). If the V prize flag is set (S90242; Y), the CPU 90103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big hit flag (S90243, S90244). Then, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit type from the “big hit D” and the “big hit E” based on the small hit type in which the V winning is generated (S90246). As the jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the big hit type is determined as "big hit D", and the V winning type concerned If the type of small hit that occurred is "small hit B", the type of big hit is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (S90247), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S90248. As an example, if the big hit type is "big hit D", the big hit type buffer value may be "3", and if "big hit E", it may be "4".

  After execution of S90247, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S9026) (S90248), and ends the small hit end processing.

  That is, in this embodiment, the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B not only during the small hit game but also during the period until the small hit end display time after the small hit game ends. Even if the game ball wins the second big winning opening just before the end of the small hit game, the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B and the big hit game is executed after the end of the small hit end processing It has become so.

  If the V prize flag is not set in S90242 (S90242; N), the CPU 90103 determines whether the time saving flag is set (S90249). If the time saving flag is set, the process proceeds to S90253. If the time saving flag is not set, the transmission setting of the game state designating command indicating the normal state is performed (S90250), and the LED for turning off right indication turning off is transmitted. The setting is performed (S90251). Note that the gaming state designation command and the right-handed LED turn-off designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. In addition, the CPU 90103 turns off the right-handed display unit 9025D and proceeds to S90253.

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S9022) in S90253, and ends the small hitting end processing.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 90103 executes each processing in the special symbol process processing to operate the game ball by operating the bat operating handle in the short time state, the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state, etc. In the gaming state to launch (to the right) to strike 9010R, the right strike display area 9025D lights up, and the game ball is launched to the left gaming area 9010L by the operation of the bat operating handle (does to strike the left) in a normal condition The right-handed display unit 9025D is turned off.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S9051) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S9054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 90122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 68) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect control process processing (S9055). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 905.

  Next, the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S9056). Then, after the error notification process (S9057) shown in FIG. 91 and the power failure recovery screen display process (S9059) shown in FIG. 92 are executed, the process proceeds to S9052.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S9055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 90120 launches a game ball such as a short game state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc. toward the right game area 9010 R (does right) in the game state If there is a right-handed notification process (S9071) to notify the player that the game is in the gaming state where the player is hit-right by displaying on the effect display device 905 or lighting the right-handed notification LED 9030, and the effect display device 905 The suspension display updating process (S9072) of updating the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 905D and the second suspension storage display area 905U to the display according to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting unit is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 performs one of the processes in S9073 to S9082 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S9074).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S9075).

  Process during effect symbol variation (S9075): Control the switching timing and the like of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitor the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S9076): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern decision command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S9077), the small hit display process (S9080) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S9078).

  During the big hit game processing (S9078): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905, display control of big hit gaming effect, sound output control, etc. are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S9079).

  Big hit end effect processing (S9079): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Small hit display process (S9080): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game in process (S9081).

  Small hit in game processing (S9081): Control of small hit in game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect process (S9082).

  Small hitting end effect processing (S9082): In the effect display device 905, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073) or the big hit display process (S9077).

  In this embodiment, when the supply of power is resumed after the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, only the effect control board 9012 is unstable in operation, including the release of the game ball. The game itself can continue. Therefore, in particular, it is possible to control the big hit gaming state by executing the variable display as in this embodiment, and the game ball passes the specific area (the third count switch 9024B in this embodiment) during the small hit game. A big hit game end based on the pachinko game machine of the type that can be controlled to the big hit game state based on what was played (the so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko game machine) or that the game ball passed a specific area during the big hit game In pachinko gaming machines in which probability variation control is implemented later, the game display is launched on the right game area 9010 R for the player by displaying a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 together with the power failure recovery screen. If not prompting, the game ball loses the opportunity to pass through the specific area, causing a disadvantage for the player. In addition, even in the game arcade clerk or the like, when the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 901, the game ball is stopped from being fired until the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended for the player. There may be a case where the game store side may not be able to appropriately take action when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. From such a reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 was resumed by executing the right-handed notification processing and the power failure recovery screen display processing described below. In this case, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the right-handed notification process (S9071) of this embodiment. In the right-handed notification process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the second mode on the effect display device 905 (S90701). In addition, the right-handed notification image is displayed to face the right game area 9010R in the upper right part of the effect display device 905 in order to notify that it is in a time-saving state, a big hit game, or a small hit game. It is an image of an arrow. Moreover, as a display mode of the right-handed notification image in this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode described above can be displayed by the effect display device 905, and the second mode is more than the first mode. Is an aspect that displays an image of a large right-pointing arrow.

  If the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the second mode (S90701; Y), the process proceeds to S90713, and the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first manner or the right-handed notification image is not displayed (S90701; N) further determines whether the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S90702). If the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S 90702; Y), the process proceeds to S 9010 and if the right-handed notification image is not being displayed in the first manner, that is, the right-handed notification image is not displayed In the case (S90702; N), the process proceeds to S90703.

  In S90703, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is reception of a power supply recovery designation command. If the power recovery specification command is received (S90703; Y), the process proceeds to S90707, and if the power recovery specification command is not received (S90703; N), the right-handed LED lighting specification command is further received It is determined whether or not (S90704). If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90704; N), the right-handed notification processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90704; Y), for effect control The CPU 90120 controls the LED control board 9014 to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 9030 (S90705). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the display of the right-handed notification image in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905 (S90706), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  Further, at S90707, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90707; N), the right-handed notification processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90707; Y), for effect control The CPU 90120 controls the LED control board 9014 to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 9030 (S90708). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the display of the right-handed notification image in the second mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905 (S90709), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  In addition, in S90710, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is reception of the LED-off indication command for right-handed notification. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S90710; N), the right-handed notification processing is ended, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S90710; Y), for effect control The CPU 90120 turns off the right-handed notification LED 9030 by controlling the LED control board 9014 (S90711). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the display of the right-handed notification image in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905 (S90712), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  Further, in S90713, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not any of the symbol determination command, the special winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command has been received. If there is reception of any of the symbol determination command, the special winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command (S90713; Y), the processing of S90711 and S90712 (right turn off notification LED 9030 and right turn off notification image Execute display end) to end the right-handed notification process, and when there is no reception of any of the symbol confirmation command, the big winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command (S90713; N), S90711 and S90712 The right-handed notification process is ended without executing the process of.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) in which the gaming state strikes the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 9010R during the game, the CPU 90120 for effect control The right-handed notification LED 9030 is turned on, and the right-handed notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905. Then, when the gaming state is controlled to the gaming state (normal state) in which the gaming ball is launched toward the left gaming area 9010L, the effect control CPU 90120 turns off the right hitting notification LED 9030 and the right in the first mode. The display of the hit notification image is ended.

  In addition, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (the power is turned off) due to the occurrence of an error such as radio wave error, magnet error, vibration detection error or the like mentioned above during the game. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed (the power is turned on) again without operating the game machine, the gaming state at the time of stopping the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is right If it is a gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) to launch to the area 9010 R, while turning on the LED 9030 for right-handed notification, turn off the right power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 905 Display in the form. Then, the symbol determination command, the big winning opening open designated command, the hit ending designated command reception, that is, the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the closing of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the big hit gaming state or the small hitting game When shifting from the state to the short time state, the effect control CPU 90120 turns off the right-handed notification LED 9030 and ends the display of the right-handed notification image in the second mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, FIG. 82, FIG. 84, FIG. 87 and FIG. 90, in this embodiment, the CPU 90103 periodically performs command control processing in the game control timer interrupt processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (S9020) is executed and the CPU90103 is linked to the right turn on display unit 9025D being turned on by directing the right turn notification LED lighting specification command and the right turn notification LED turn off specification command to the effect control board 9012 Then, it is possible that the effect control CPU 90120 turns on the right notification LED 9030 and the effect control CPU 90120 turns off the right notification LED 9030 in conjunction with the CPU 90103 turning off the right display portion 9025D. Therefore, even if the player does not visually recognize the right-handed display portion 9025D, the gaming state strikes the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 9010R by visually recognizing the right-handed notification LED 9030, a short state, a big hit gaming state, small It is possible to determine whether or not it is a hit gaming state.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an error notification process (S9057) of this embodiment. In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether the error notification timer is in operation (S90501).

  If the error informing timer is not in operation, that is, if the error informing is not performed, the process proceeds to S9052.

  On the other hand, if the error informing timer is in operation, that is, if the error informing is being executed, after the error informing timer is decremented by one (S90510), the error informing timer after timer subtraction is up. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S90511).

  If the timer is not up during error notification (S90511; N), the process proceeds to S9052 without passing through S90512 and S90513.

  On the other hand, if the error notification in-process timer is up (S90511; Y), the error notification in-progress flag is cleared (S90512), and the error notification in progress is ended (S90513), and the process proceeds to S90502.

  In S90502, it is determined whether the error designation command reception flag is set. The error designation command reception flag is set in the command analysis processing when the command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is identified as the error designation command in the command analysis processing (S9054) described above.

  If the error designation command reception flag is not set (S90502; N), the error notification process is ended. On the other hand, when the error designation command reception flag is set (S90502; Y), the set error designation command reception flag is cleared (S90503), and the error designation command stored in the error designation command storage area is The error type is specified from (specifically, the value of EXT) (S90504), the notification mode set for the specified error type, specifically, the contents to be displayed on the effect display device 905, and the game effect The lighting mode of the LED 909 and the voice to be output are specified (S90505), and the error notification is started in the specified notification mode (S90506).

  Then, the error type specified in S90504 is an error having a notification period, for example, a vibration detection 2 error in which 60 seconds is set as a release period (notification period), or 300 seconds as a release period (notification period) It is determined whether or not there is a starting opening 2 abnormal winning error or the like.

  If the error type is an error having a notification period (S90507; Y), the error notification flag is set together with a value corresponding to the notification period in the error notification informing timer and the timer notification timer timer count is started. The error notification process ends. As a result, the notification of the error started in S90506 ends when the timer in the error notification is up.

  On the other hand, if the error type is not an error having a notification period (S90507; N), only the error notification in progress flag is set, and the error notification processing is ended without starting the timer count of the error notification in progress timer. As a result, since the timer informing error notification is not determined to be in operation in S90501 described above, the notification of the error started in S90506 is continued until the next error designation command is received.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a power failure recovery screen display process (S9059) of this embodiment. In the power failure recovery screen display process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether the recovery screen display process timer described later is in operation, that is, whether the power failure recovery screen is being displayed in the performance display device 905 or not. It is determined whether or not (S90611). If the recovery screen display process timer is in operation (S90611; Y), the process proceeds to S90618, and if the recovery screen display process timer is not in operation (S90611; N), whether or not the power failure recovery designation command is received Is determined (S90612). When the power failure recovery designation command is not received (S90612; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is ended, and when the power failure recovery designation command is received (S90612; Y), further, for right-handed notification It is determined whether the LED lighting designation command has been received (S90613).

  If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90613; N), a power failure recovery screen (power left-off notification to notify the game ball to be launched toward the left gaming area 9010L in the effect display device 905 Proceed to S90616 (S90614), when there is reception of the LED lighting specification command for right-handed notification (S90613; Y), the effect display device Select the right-handed recovery screen display process table for displaying a power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) to notify the game ball to launch toward the right gaming area 9010R in 905, and proceed to S90616 (S90615).

  Then, in S90615, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer in the recovery screen display process data 1 of the recovery screen display process table selected in S90614 or S90615. In the recovery screen display process table selected in S90614 or S90615, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, and sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with the respective recovery screen display process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of the recovery screen display process data 1 (display control execution data 1 and sound control execution data 1 etc.) to the effect device (effect component as a effect component, effect display device 905 as a component, effect as a component The control of the speakers 908 L, 908 R, etc., which are the parts for control parts, is executed, and the display of the power failure recovery screen is started (S90617). For example, in order to display the power failure recovery screen corresponding to the recovery screen display process table selected in S90614 or S90615 in the effect display device 905, an instruction is output to the display control unit 90123. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 908 L and 908 R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 9013. Then, the power failure recovery screen display process ends.

  On the other hand, at S90618, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the value of the recovery screen display process timer by one. Then, it is determined whether the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S90619). When the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S90619; Y), the recovery screen display process data is switched (S90620). That is, the recovery screen display process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the recovery screen display process table in the recovery screen display process timer (S90621). In addition, the control state of the rendering device (component for presentation) is changed based on the display control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next to the display control execution data (S90622). Then, the process proceeds to step S90624.

  On the other hand, when the recovery screen display process timer has not timed out (S90619; N), effects are produced according to the contents (display control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) of recovery screen display process data corresponding to the recovery screen display process timer. The control of the apparatus (component for presentation) is executed (S90623), and the process proceeds to S90624.

  Then, in step S90624, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. When there is reception of the special winning opening open designation command (S90624; Y), in addition to the power failure recovery screen being displayed on the effect display device 905, the effect display device 905 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The display of the notification image during the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is open is started, and the process proceeds to S90629. If the special winning opening open designation command has not been received (S90624; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening notification image is being displayed (S90626). If the special winning opening open notification image is not being displayed (S90626; N), the processing proceeds to S90629, and if the special winning opening opening notification image is being displayed (S90626; Y), the special winning opening after the release of the designated command It is determined whether or not there is reception, that is, it is determined whether the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (S90627). If there is no reception of the designated command after releasing the special winning opening (S90627; N), the power failure restoration screen display processing is ended, and if there is reception of the specifying command after releasing the special winning opening (S90627; Y), the special winning opening The display of the notification image during opening is ended, and the process proceeds to S90630 (S90628).

  Then, at S90629, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not any of the symbol determination command or the hit end designation command has been received. If there is reception of either the symbol determination command or the hit end designation command (S90629; Y), the recovery screen display process timer is cleared, the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended, and the power failure recovery screen display processing is ended. Do. If neither the symbol determination command nor the end designation command has been received (S90629; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is ended without executing S90630.

  That is, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 supplies power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 due to the occurrence of an error such as radio wave error, magnet error, vibration detection error or the like mentioned above during the game. If it is stopped (power is turned off) and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed (the power is turned on) without operating the clear switch, power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. If the gaming state at the time of the play is the normal state, the left display failure recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 905. Then, when the reception of the symbol determination command, that is, the variation of the special symbol stops, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the display of the left-turn power failure recovery screen.

  In addition, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed (the power is turned on) without operating the clear switch, the gaming state at the time of stopping the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the gaming ball If it is a gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) to launch the game to the right gaming area 9010 R, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a right-turn power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 905. Then, the symbol determination command, the big winning opening open designated command, the hit ending designated command reception, that is, the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the closing of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the big hit gaming state or the small hitting game When transitioning from the state to the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the display of the power-on-the-wire restoration screen for right-handed use.

  Furthermore, when the large winning opening open command is received during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, that is, when the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in the large hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The effect control CPU 90120 displays a notification image showing the special winning opening open on the effect display device 905, and informs the player that the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is open. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the power failure recovery screen is displayed during the big hit game or the small hit game, the notification image is displayed on the effect display device 905 while the big winning opening is open. Since the game ball can be urged to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 9010 R so that the game ball wins the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, the first big winning in the big hit game The game ball is not won by the game ball does not win the game ball by the game ball does not get to the player by the game ball does not win the game ball by the game ball does not win the game ball by the small hit game It is possible to reduce the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player, such as the possibility that the big hit game will be started (controlled to the big hit game state) without passing through the third count switch 9024B. In other words, the game value in this embodiment is the number of winning balls awarded by the game ball winning in the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, and after the gaming ball is winning in the second large winning opening It means being controlled to a big hit game state by having passed the 3rd count switch 9024B.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening open notification image is displayed only during the opening of the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, that is, Although the display and non-display of the special winning opening open notification image is repeatedly executed by repeating the opening of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the big winning opening open notification image is the end of the opening of the last first big winning opening or second big winning opening in the big hit game or small hit game until the big hit game or small hit game is finished It may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this embodiment, the special display opening is opened on the effect display device 905 to notify that the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is open during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen. Although the form which displays a middle information picture was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, and the 1st big winning a prize opening or the 2nd big winning a prize opening is open while the display for right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed. The notification of the presence may be executed by sound output from the speakers 908 L, 908 R, light emission of the game effect LED 909 or the like in addition to or instead of the display of the image on the effect display device 905.

  Next, FIG. 93 and FIG. 94 show the lighting mode of the right-handed notification LED 9030, the display mode of the right-handed notification image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, and the display mode of the big winning opening open notification image in this embodiment. It explains based on it.

  First, the case where the gaming state is the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (A), since the normal state is a gaming state in which the game ball is launched toward the left gaming area 9010L, the right-handed notification LED 9030 is extinguished. As shown in FIG. 93 (B), when an error such as a vibration detection 1 error is stopped during the execution of the variable display in the normal state, a pachinko gaming machine is operated by an operation of a game clerk or the like. The supply of power to the machine 901 is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started again by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, as shown in FIG. 93C, the effect display device 905 is restored as a left-turn power failure recovery screen. A message such as "Please wait for a while" is displayed.

  Next, the case where the gaming state is the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, and the big hitting gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, the lighting mode of the right hitting notification LED 9030 in the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, the big hitting gaming state, the display mode of the right hitting notification image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, the notification of the big winning opening open Since the display mode of the image is the same, an example in the small hit game state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the small hit gaming state (and the time saving state, the big hit gaming state) is a gaming state in which the gaming ball is launched toward the right gaming area 9010R, so the right hitting notification LED 9030 lights up. There is. Further, during the small hit gaming state (and the time saving state, the big hit gaming state), the right-handed notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (B), when an error such as vibration detection 1 error is stopped in the small hit game is detected, the electric power of the pachinko game machine 901 is operated by the operation of the store clerk etc. Supply is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started again by the operation of a store clerk or the like at the game arcade, as shown in FIG. "Please continue to hit the right" will be displayed.

  It should be noted that while the display for the right-handed power failure recovery screen is displayed, the right-handed notification LED 9030 lights up because the gaming state at the point when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is the small hitting gaming state. In the upper right portion of the effect display device 905, a right-handed notification image is displayed in the second mode. Then, when the second large winning opening (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening during the big hit game) is opened while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed, the large winning in the lower part of the effect display device 905 A message such as "the big winning opening is open" is displayed as the notification image during the opening of the mouth.

  In this embodiment, while the game state is a big hit game state and a small hit game state, a common winning opening open notification position image is displayed during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is a big hit gaming state and a small hit gaming state while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed. It is also possible to display a notification image of the big winning opening open of a different aspect.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening opened during the display of the right-handed power failure restoration screen displays a notification image during the opening of the special winning opening common to the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the special winning opening opened during display of the right-handed power failure restoration screen is different between the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. The notification image may be displayed during opening of the special winning opening of the player so that the player can easily recognize which of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening the game ball should be won.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed in the gaming state in which the gaming balls such as the time saving state, the big hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state are launched toward the right gaming area 9010R. Pachinko gaming machine by displaying the right-handed notification image together with the right-handed power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 905 when stopping and resuming the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 without operating the clear switch. When the supply of power is resumed at 901, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced by not displaying the game area for firing the game ball on the effect display device 905.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the lighting mode of the right-handed notification LED 9030 is controlled from the normal state to the big hit gaming state etc. when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. The display mode of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 is the same as the case of the first case when the gaming state is controlled from the normal state to the big hit gaming state etc., and to the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the second mode and the second mode when the supply of power is resumed, the player confirms whether the display mode of the right-handed notification image is the first mode or the second mode. By doing this, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a state where the supply of power is resumed.

  Further, since the effect control CPU 90120 displays the power failure recovery screen and the right-turn notification image on the effect display device 905 based on the reception of the right-touch notification LED lighting specification command from the CPU 90103, the effect display device 905 Since there is no need to provide a dedicated command for designating the start of the display of the power failure recovery screen or a dedicated command for designating the start of the display of the right notification image on the effect display device 905, the number of commands increases. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even at timings other than when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command and the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command finely divide the right-handed notification. The turning on / off of the LED 9030 can be interlocked with the display start / display end of the right-handed notification image.

  Further, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and executes a command control process (S9020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and performs the same interrupt command control process. The power failure recovery specification command and the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by the disconnection restoration specification command and the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command, so that the power failure recovery in the effect display device 905 The display start timing of the screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notice image can be made the same, and the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notice image are different. To prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as the hit notification image being missed by the player It can be.

  Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notification image in the effect display device 905 are the same, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the display start timing of the right-handed notification image, it may be different from the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen if the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment is provided with a right-handed display unit 9025D that can notify that the game area to fire the game ball is the right game area 9010R by the lighting control and the extinguishing control by the CPU 90103, Transmits the right turn notification LED turn on command to the effect control board 9012 along with the lighting control of the right turn display unit 9025D, and the effect control board 9012 along with the turn-off control of the right turn display unit 9025D. Since the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command is transmitted, the lighting state of the right-handed display unit 9025D and the display state of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 are interlocked with each other. The display of the hit notification image can be appropriately performed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment can control the first special winning opening in a closed state where the gaming ball can not win and an open state where the gaming ball can win the first special variable winning ball device 907A. And a second special variable winning ball device 907B capable of controlling the second big winning opening in a closed state in which the gaming ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the gaming ball can win a prize; And the second ball winning prize processing (S9012) which gives a winning ball based on the winning of the game ball in the second big winning opening, and the gaming ball won the second big winning hole during the small hit game The gaming state can be controlled to the big hit gaming state based on passing through the third count switch 9024B. Then, in the effect display device 905, since the notification image is displayed while the big winning opening is open based on the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening, the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 When reopened, it is possible for the player to recognize that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are in an open state in which the game ball can be won, and the first big game ball is not fired. The player's fault such as not being controlled to the big hit gaming state by the fact that the game ball does not get a prize ball in the winning opening or the second big winning hole and the game ball does not pass the third count switch 9024B The generation of profits can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening open notification image is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the opening of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the display of the power failure recovery screen is in a big hit game or a small hit game, the notification image for the big winning opening is the first big winning opening Alternatively, it may be displayed on the effect display device 5 before the second big winning opening is released to make it possible for the player to recognize that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. Although the present invention has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the display of the power failure recovery screen, even when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are opened, the notification image of the large winning opening is open. May not be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen (normally variable winning ball device 906B is normally open When changing from the state to the enlarged open state), the effect display device 905 may display an image notifying that the game ball has become available for winning in the second start winning opening. That is, the "variable winning device" of the means 6 in this embodiment may be the first special variable winning ball device 907A or the second special variable winning ball device 907B as in this embodiment, or the second start winning opening. It may be a normally variable winning ball device 906B to be formed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning opening open notification image is either the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. May be displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that only the key is released.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the process of S90414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the "radio wave error" whose occurrence has been determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the "magnet error" being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the supply of power is resumed, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the effect display device 905 to display a power failure recovery screen (on the basis of the reception of the right turn notification LED lighting specification command from the CPU 90103). Although the mode for displaying the right-handed power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 90120 restarts the supply of power. The power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) and the right-handed notification image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the reception of the game state designation command according to the gaming state from the CPU 90103. By doing this, it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notice image on the effect display device 905, and an increase in the number of commands can be suppressed.

  Specifically, Modification 1 will be described based on FIG. 95 to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 95, in the game control main processing in the present modification 1, the CPU 90103 executes the processing of Sa901 to Sa908 and Sa9041 to Sa9044, and then the gaming state according to the gaming state specified in the processing of Sa9044. The transmission setting of the designated command is performed (Sa 9046 a), and the processing of Sa 9048 and Sa 9015 to Sa 9020 is executed. Note that the gaming state designation command transmitted and set in Sa 46 a is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by the command control process (S 20).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes S90701 to S90703 and determines in S90703 that there has been reception of the power failure recovery designation command, the gaming state designation command which has received both the power recovery specification command The game state is specified (S90707a). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is the normal state (S90707 b), and if the specified gaming state is any of the short time state, the big hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state (S90707 b; N), The processes in S90708 and S90709 are executed to turn on the right-handed notification LED 9030 and start displaying the right-handed notification image of the first aspect on the effect display device 905.

  When the gaming state changes from the normal state to the big hit gaming state or the like by the CPU 90103 executing the special symbol process processing, the effect control CPU 90120 is received from the CPU 90103 as shown in the processing of S90704 a to S90704 c. The game state is specified from the game state specification command, and if the specified game state is not the normal state, that is, if it is a big hit game state, S90705 and S90706 are executed to turn on the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the effect display device 905 The display of the right-handed notification image of the first aspect of the present invention may be started. Then, if it is determined that the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode in S90702 (S90702; Y), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the gaming state received from the CPU 90103 as shown in the processing of S90710a to S90710c. The game state is specified from the designated command, and if the specified game state is the normal state, S90708 and S90709 are executed to turn off the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed notification image of the first aspect in the effect display device 905 The display of should be finished.

  As described above, in the first modification, there is no need to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of commands while controlling the gaming state according to the gaming state. The display of the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 can be realized in detail by the designated command.

  In the first modification, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the CPU 90103 transmits a game state designation command according to the game state to the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120), The effect control CPU 90120 exemplifies a mode in which the right-turn notification image is displayed on the effect display device 905 together with the power failure recovery screen according to the game state specified from the game state designating command received from the CPU 90103. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the CPU 90103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command according to the gaming state to the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120), The effect control CPU 90120 receives the power failure recovery designation command received from the CPU 90103 With power interruption recovery screen effect display device 905 according to al specified game state may be displayed right-handed notification image.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit game is executed while the display of the big hit game effect is executed in the effect display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the big hit game effect, Not only the effect of 1 but a plurality of effects may be executable. When a plurality of effects can be executed as a big hit game effect, the player may select an effect to be executed during the big hit game by operating the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the player can select the effect to be executed during the big hit game by the operation of the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A as described above, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during selection of the effect. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed when the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped, the processing of the CPU 90120 for effect control can be reduced by executing a predetermined effect of 1 as a big hit game effect. May be

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (A) to FIG. 98 (E) as the second modification, the effect control CPU 90120 is derived and displayed in a combination showing the effect symbol is a big hit, and then the first round of the big hit game In B, the options of BGM (music) output from the speakers 908L and 908R as a big hit game effect during the big hit game are displayed (the choices of song A, song B, and song C shown in FIG. 98 (B)).

  On the screen shown in FIG. 98 (B), the player or the like selects any one of the options by the operation of the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A and performs the determination operation, thereby performing the image shown in FIG. 98 (B). When the display ends, the effect display device 905 displays an image as a big hit game effect, and BGM corresponding to the determined option is output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  On the other hand, in the state where it is not determined which BGM to output yet, that is, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped while the BGM option is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered again. When it is turned on, the right-handed power failure restoration screen and the right-handed notification image are displayed in the effect display device 905 as in the previous embodiment.

  Then, when the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed and the first round is finished, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the effect display device 905 to display an image as a big hit game effect, as shown in FIG. Among the options displayed in), one BGM (the song C in the present modification 2) is determined as the BGM output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the output from the speakers 908L and 908R of the determined BGM is started.

  In the second modification, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped while the option of BGM is displayed, the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, and then from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although the form which determines BGM to output uniquely was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, When the supply of the power to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped during the display of the option of BGM, After the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the BGM output from the speakers 908L and 908R may be randomly determined from among the displayed options.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect display device 905 is right based on the fact that the game state is controlled to the game state in which the game balls such as the short time state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state are launched toward the right game area 9010R. Although the hit notification image is displayed to prompt the player to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area 9010R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is the normal state, that is, When the gaming state is controlled to launch the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 9010L, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an effect display based on detection that the gaming ball has been launched toward the right gaming area 9010R. Direct the game ball to the left game area 9010 L by the display on the device 905, the sound output by the speakers 908 L, 908 R, the light emission of the game effect LED 909, etc. It may be a warning notification to give blood. In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 that warns and warns that the game ball should be launched to the left game area 9010 L based on the detection that the game ball has been launched to the right game area 9010 R. If the rendering symbol is derived and displayed as a change display result indicating a big hit or a small hit during execution of the warning notification, the warning notification may be stopped.

  In the embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the CPU 90103 receives a power failure recovery designation command and an LED for right-handed notification when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. Although a mode in which the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image are displayed on the effect display device 905 by transmitting the lighting specification command to the effect control board 9012 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A storage unit capable of storing at least a part of the process being executed by the effect control CPU 90120 when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is provided on the effect control board 9012 to the pachinko gaming machine 901 When the power supply to the device is resumed, no reception from the CPU 90103 such as a power failure recovery specification command or a right-handed LED lighting specification command Performance display device 905 may be capable of displaying the power interruption recovery screen and right-handed notification image on the basis of the contents of the stored in the storage unit.

  In the above embodiment, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are provided in the right gaming area 9010R so that only the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 9010R can be won, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and the first large winning opening and the second winning opening may be provided at positions where it is possible to win a game ball flowing down the left gaming area 9010L. In this case, when the first big winning opening and the second winning opening are provided at positions where the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 9010 L can win, a pachinko gaming machine 901 during a big hit game or a small hit game. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the game display ball is directed to the left game area 9010 L together with the left-turn power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 905 A left strike notification image may be displayed prompting to launch. In other words, the “specific route” in the present invention is a route in which the special winning opening that is open when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed regardless of the right and left of the game area. Just do it.

  Furthermore, if it is an area where it is possible to launch a game ball, the right game area 9010 R such as the upper part of the center decoration frame surrounding the periphery of the effect display device 905 and the left game It may be provided in an area other than the area 9010L. As described above, when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are provided in the area other than the right gaming area 9010R and the left gaming area 9010L, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is used during the big hit and small hit games. When the supply is stopped and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the effect display device 905 is provided with the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (for example, the center A notification image may be displayed prompting the user to shoot toward the top of the decoration frame or the like.

  In the above embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped and the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed during the hit game or the small hit game, for right-handed notification Although the embodiment in which the LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D are lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped during the hit game or the small hit game. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the right-handed notification LED 9030 may not be turned on. Further, the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D in the above-described embodiment are omitted, and a promotion display is provided to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific route on the effect display device 905. It is also good. Further, instead of the notification by the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display unit 9025D in the embodiment, notification may be performed by audio output by the speakers 908L, 908R or the like.

  In the embodiment, the CPU 90103 controls lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed display unit 9025D, and the effect control CPU 90120 controls lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed notification LED 9030. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. There is no limitation, and the CPU 90103 may control both turning on and off the right-handed display unit 9025D and the right-handed notification LED 9030.

  Further, although the pachinko game machine 901 is illustrated as an example of a game machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is the inside of the game machine In addition, the number of balls that have been enclosed so as to be able to circulate and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the game values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 90120 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time and a type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one variation pattern specification command when starting a variation Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU for effect control 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 90103 uses, for example, the first command to change time or a change mode before reaching reach (before reaching a so-called second stop when not reaching reach). The second command indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time may be notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 90120 may be used for the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. The selection may be made by When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game ball is shot out from below the game area by the ball striking device, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball striking device may be pachinko game machine 901 The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing the game ball at the upper position of the game area.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment has illustrated the form which made the starting winning opening two in 1st starting winning opening and 2nd starting winning opening, this invention is not limited to this, and starting winning opening The number of start winning openings may be three or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two in 1st special figure and 2nd special figure is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is one It is good also as three or more special symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B respectively variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as a display result, and then stop the final stop symbol. Although the present invention is not limited to this, after displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner without including the final stop symbol as a display result, the final stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It may be That is, the final stop symbol to be the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  Further, although the embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the time-saving control is carried out after the end of the big hit game (playing state is controlled to the short state state), the present invention is not limited to this. A jackpot type may be provided in which probability fluctuation control is performed such that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is increased after the end of the jackpot game. In the pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of performing probability variation control, probability variation control may be performed after the end of the big hit game based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed the third count switch 9023B during the big hit game.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine which allows a player to play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko Machine 8a 1st Special Symbol Display 8b 2nd Special Symbol Display 9 Effect Display (Main Display)
9a 1st storage memory display portion 9b 2nd storage memory display portion 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 20 special variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Effect control board 100 Microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP
901 Pachinko gaming machine 904A 1st special symbol indicator 904B 2nd special symbol indicator 905 effect display device 9025D right-handed display part 9030 LED for right-handed notification
90103 CPU
90120 CPU for effect control

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
After the specific display is displayed according to the first aspect, a change production performing means capable of executing a change production for changing the display mode of the specific display is provided,
The change production executing means is
As the change effect, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific display to the second aspect having a high degree of advantage,
As a change effect, after the specific indication is displayed according to the first aspect, when the display aspect of the specific indication is not changed to the second aspect, an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific indication to the third aspect can be performed And
The specific indication displayed according to the third aspect has a lower rate of change to the second aspect than the specific indication displayed according to the first aspect,
further,
Launching means capable of launching a game medium based on the operation of the player;
A first control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing recovery processing of the gaming state when receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply;
A display means capable of displaying a promotion display for promoting firing of the game medium so as to flow down a specific one of the flow paths through which the game medium flows, and a display means capable of displaying a recovery display related to the recovery process.
A means different from the display means, wherein the notification means is capable of promoting notification to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path;
Second control means for controlling display on the display means based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The second control means is capable of performing control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display. A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
After the specific display is displayed according to the first aspect, a change production performing means capable of executing a change production for changing the display mode of the specific display is provided,
The change production executing means is
As the change effect, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific display to the second aspect having a high degree of advantage,
As a change effect, after the specific indication is displayed according to the first aspect, when the display aspect of the specific indication is not changed to the second aspect, an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific indication to the third aspect can be performed And
The specific indication displayed by the third aspect has a lower degree of advantage than the specific indication displayed by the first aspect,
further,
Launching means capable of launching a game medium based on the operation of the player;
A first control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing recovery processing of the gaming state when receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply;
A display means capable of displaying a promotion display for promoting firing of the game medium so as to flow down a specific one of the flow paths through which the game medium flows, and a display means capable of displaying a recovery display related to the recovery process.
A means different from the display means, wherein the notification means is capable of promoting notification to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path;
Second control means for controlling display on the display means based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The second control means is capable of performing control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display.